- 1.17 MB
- 2021-10-11 发布
- 1、本文档由用户上传，淘文库整理发布，可阅读全部内容。
- 2、本文档内容版权归属内容提供方，所产生的收益全部归内容提供方所有。如果您对本文有版权争议，请立即联系网站客服。
- 3、本文档由用户上传，本站不保证质量和数量令人满意，可能有诸多瑕疵，付费之前，请仔细阅读内容确认后进行付费下载。
- 网站客服QQ：403074932
2015-2016沪教牛津版初中英语八年级上册
全套教学案
Content
第一讲...........................................................................................................................2
Unit1 Language points..................................................................................................2
第二讲...........................................................................................................................9
Grammar-不定代词.............................................................................................9
第三讲..........................................................................................................................13
Unit2 Language points.................................................................................................13
第四讲..........................................................................................................................27
Grammar-数词...................................................................................................27
第五讲..........................................................................................................................35
Unit3 Language points.................................................................................................35
第六讲..........................................................................................................................46
Grammar-形容词和副词...................................................................................46
第七讲..........................................................................................................................56
Unit4 Language points.................................................................................................56
第八讲..........................................................................................................................70
Grammar-形容词副词同级比较.......................................................................70
第九讲..........................................................................................................................76
Unit5 Language points.................................................................................................76
第十讲..........................................................................................................................89
Grammar-现在完成时.......................................................................................89
第十一讲......................................................................................................................97
Unit6 Language points.................................................................................................97
第十二讲....................................................................................................................108
Grammar-现在完成时补充.............................................................................108
第十三讲....................................................................................................................116
Unit7 Language points...............................................................................................116
第十四讲....................................................................................................................128
Grammar-if条件状语从句..............................................................................128
第十五讲....................................................................................................................133
Unit8 Language points...............................................................................................133
第十六讲....................................................................................................................138
Grammar-情态动词.........................................................................................138
单元测........................................................................................................... .....144
Vocabulary..................................................................................................................230
八年级上册英语教案资料
第一讲
Unit1
◆ 知识探究
1. Is my encyclopaedia useful, Lo?
1) useful: 有用的，有益的，有帮助的 a useful book
2) use +ful= useful 名词+ful= 形容词
3) 以-ful结尾的形容词的反义词多是相应的以-less结尾的形容词。
eg: useful--useless careful--careless helpful--helpless
2. Leonardo da Vinci was an Italian painter, inventor, musician,engineer and scientist.
动词后加后缀-er/ -or构成一种职业。
eg: teach 教-- teacher 教师 sing 唱-- singer 歌唱家
visit 参观-- visitor 参观者 invent 发明-- inventor 发明家
3. cook v. 烹饪 My mother cooked a delicious meal for us.
n. 厨师 My father is a famous cook.
cooker n. 厨具 Do you think rice cooker is a useful cooker?
4. Look it up!
查阅；查询，强调在词典、参考书等工具书里查阅。
We can look up new words in a dictionary.
【拓展】：look up 仰视；向上看
He looked up from his book as I came into the room.
look的相关短语：
look around 环顾四周
look after 照顾
look for 寻找
look forward to 盼望
look like 看起来像
1. Da Vinci was born in the countryside.
be born 出生 一般用于过去式 was born/ were born
be born in + 地点 I was born in Guangzhou.
be born in + 某年/某月 Jim was born in July.
be born on+ 具体到某一天 The twins were born on 1st January.
2. From an early age, he showed great intelligence and artistic ability.
show 1) 出示，展示，显露，露出
He showed his photo to me = He showed me his photo.
2) 流露，表示，表现
He showed great interest in science when he was young.
3) 教，告诉，说明，指点
He showed me the way on the map.
3. His painting are very famous , and one, the Mona Lisa, is perhaps the most famous painting in the world.
famous = well-known
be famous for
be famous as
4. Dinosaurs lived on the Earth more than 60 million years before human beings.
more than 超过；多于，相当于over, less than 少于
They have more than a car.
million 百万
1）与具体的数字连用时，不加s ，后面直接接复数名词。
There are about two thousand students in this school.
2) 固定短语：millions of hundred, thousand, billion和million的用法相同
Millions of people help them in different ways.
Tips: hundred, thousand 和million,有时含糊有时清。
清时无-s和of， 糊时-s和of跟
5. They lived everywhere on Earth.
everywhere 副词 “到处”，相当于here and there
辨析：
everywhere
到处
用于肯定句
nowhere
anywhere
somewhere
1. Some dinosaurs were as small as chickens.
As.....as 与.....一样......
1) 当两个比较对象在某方面相同时，用“ as + 形容词/副词原级+as”结构，
表示“（A和B）一样”...... This tree is as tall as that one.
2) 比较两个对象时，若一方不及另一方，则用“not as/so+形容词/副词原级+as”结构，
表示“A不如B....” Our school is not as big as yours.
2. However, some dinosaurs liked to eat meat.
however “然而，但是”
However, this does not always happen.
She falls ill. She goes to work, however, and stays up late.
He says that it is so. He is wrong, however.
however
然而，转折的意味较弱
可位于句首，句中，句末
后面常用逗号分开
He likes music. However, his wife doesn’t.
but
但是；转折的意味很强烈
位于分句的句首
后面不使用逗号
He likes music, but his wife doesn’t.
3. Nobody knows why.
nobody 不定代词，“没有人”，相当于 no one. Nobody作主语时，谓语动词 要用单数形式。
There was nobody in the room.
everybody
每个人；人人
somebody
某人
anybody
任何人；无论谁
1. at the end of 在......的末尾；在......的尽头 +时间/地点
There is a park at the end of the road.
We will have an exam at the end of the month.
2. used to do 过去常常做某事，并且含有现在已不做之意。
I used to go to that primary school.
3. help sb do sth 帮助某人做某事
He often helps me study English.
He often helps me with my English.
【拓展】：help oneself to ... 随便吃些......
Help yourselves to some fish, children.
Can’t help doing .... 禁不住做......
She can’t help laughing.
4. Just remember to think and to dream.
remember 及物动词
Please remember the story.
辨析：remember to do sth 与remember doing sth
remember to do sth
记得去做某事（此事还未做）
Remember to post his letter
记得要为他寄信
remember doing sth
记得已做过某事（此事已做完）
I remember posting his letter
我记得已帮他寄过信。
5. Some were small; others were huge.
some ...others... 一些......另一些......
others 指除去一部分之后的另一些，但不是剩余的全部。
There are lots of people in the park. Some are walking and others are climbing the hill.
some...the others 一些......其余的......,
the others 指剩下的全部包含在内的“其余的人或事物”
There are many children on the beach. Some can swim but the others can’t.
1. How long did dinosaurs live on Earth before they disappeared?
How long “多长时间”用于提问一段时间，还可以提问物体的长度。
--How long will you stay in Hong Kong?
--For ten days.
how often
how soon
how many
2. Jane Dickinson won Magic TV Quiz.
win 是及物动词，意为“赢得，获胜”，后面接的宾语一般是比赛、辩论或战斗等名词。
Who won the men’s 400 meters race?
We must win today.
beat 击败，打败，胜过， 后面接的宾语是参加比赛的人、团体等。
Li Lei beat Jim and won the first prize.
3. She can find out about many......
find out 了解（到）；弄清；
I try to find out who broke the machine.
辨析：
find out
查明
指通过观察、探索等努力才查明结果
find
发现，找到
强调结果
look for
寻找
强调过程
I lost my pen. I have looked for it everywhere, but I can’t find it. Could you help me find out who has found it?
4. It’s always useful to have an encyclopaedia around the house.
句型：It’s + adj (+for sb) + to do sth. 做某事（对于某人来说）是......的
It’s very important for us to learn English.
look like 看起来像
用法
1. 用作不及物动词,意为“看,望,瞧”。
1)单独使用时,后不跟介词。如:
I looked but saw nothing.我看了,但什么也没看见。
2)和at连用。
Look at these pictures. How beautiful they are!看这些画,它们是多么漂亮啊!
2. 用作连系动词,意为“看起来”。
1)后跟形容词。
如: You look well/fine/healthy.你看起来很健康。
The teacher looks happy. 老师看上去很高兴。
She looks pale. 她面色苍白。
Landy wanted something to make people come to his fruit shop, so he built the Big banana.
make sb do sth 使某人/让某人做某事
The boss made me work twelve hours a day.
make sb + adj
This terrible news made her sad.
巩固提升
一、根据句意及首字母或汉语提示完成单词。
1. Edison was a great i in the world.
2. --How much is the book?
--Twenty d .
3. Sally was b in a small town in London.
4. There are two (笔记本) on the desk.
二、 用所给单词的适当形式填空。
1. It is useful (learn) a foreign language.
2. Can you help me (carry) the box, Lily?
3. Remember (write) to me when you get to Beijing.
1. I need some (potato) . Do you have any?
2. About two (million ) people listened to the programme.
3. I think telephone is one of the most important (invent) in the world.
4. Tom wants to be a (cook) in the future.
三． 单选题。
1. This morning I some new restaurant on the Internet for I wanted to take Mia to a nice restaurant for her birthday.
A.picked up B. looked up C. cleaned up D. gave up
2. My mother was born a cold morning.
A. on B. at C. in D.during
3. Zhou Jielun is famous a singer.
A. as B. for C. in D. at
4. He wrote songs.
A. hundred B. one hundred C. hundred of D. one hundred of
5. He often helps me my Maths.
A. to B. with C. on D. in
6. My host family tried to cook _________ for me when I studied in London.
A. different something B. different anything
C. something different D. anything different
7. -- _________ do you watch TV every week?
-- Less than two hours. I often have much homework to do.
A. How many B. How much
C. How long D. How often
8. Our team _________ the match. We have got the first place.
A. hit B. beat C. won D. watched
9. --Steven, could you help _________ when he plane will take of on the Internet?
--Sorry, my computer doesn’t work.
A. get on B. find out C.look for D. look after
10. -- I often have hamburgers for lunch.
--You’d better not. It’s bad for you too much junk food.
A. eat B.to eat C. eating D. ate
11. He lost his key. It made him in the cold to wait for his wife’s return.
A.to stay B. stayed C. stays D. stay
12. In our school library there a number of the books on science, and in these year the number of them growing larger and larger.
A.are; is B. is; are C. have; are D. has; is
13. You can get much about the World Expo on the Internet.
A.map B. picture C. ticket D. information
14. birds died because of pollution.
A. Two millions B. Millions of C. Million of D. Two millions of
15. What a find day! Let’s go a walk.
A. for B. at C. out D. in
第二讲
Grammar
重点：some和any;复合不定代词
1. 观察下列句子，并进行填空。
I have some bread.
I have some apples.
Do you have any bread?
Do you have any apples?
some作形容词用时,可以修饰 ,也可以修饰 ; 通常用于 句。
any作形容词用时,可以修饰 ,也可以修饰 ；通常用于 句和 句。
2. May I have some noodles?
Would you like some tea?
在疑问句中，当我们期望得到肯定回答时，我们也会用some。
一、用some和any填空
1. There isn’t ______ milk in the fridge.
2 .I can see ______ cars, but I can’t see ______ buses.
3. He has ______ friends in England.
4. Were there ______ trees on the farm?
5. Would you like ______ tea?
No ,I’d not like ______ tea, but I’d like ______ cakes.
复合不定代词
复合不定代词是由some, any, no, every加-body, -thing, -one构成
some body
any thing
every one
no
somebody=someone anybody=anyone nobody=no one
用法:
1. 一般来说，由some构成的复合不定代词往往用于肯定句中；而由any构成的复合不定代词则往往用于否定句或疑问句中。
Is there anyone at home?
I heard someone singing when I was at work last night.
2. 复合不定代词与谓语的一致问题
复合不定代词作主语时，谓语动词用单数。
Nobody knows why.
Everyone has a hobby.
3 .复合不定代词的定语位置
复合不定代词被定语修饰的时候，定语必须放在不定代词后面。
eg: something important, anything special等
Do you have anything important to tell us?
4. 复合不定代词的否定
常表达的结构有两种：
1). not+全部肯定词
There is not anybody in the room
2) . ..... +全部否定词
there is nobody in the room.
Tips: 复合代词不张扬，修饰成分后面藏，
单数动词作谓语，何时何地都一样。
随堂练习：
一、选择填空：
( ) 1. I’m hungry. I want ______ to eat.
A. anything B. something C. everything D. nothing
( ) 2. —Do you have ______ to say for yourself?
—No, I have ______ to say.
A. something; everything B. nothing; something
C. everything; anything D. anything; nothing
( ) 3. Why not ask ______ to help you?
A. everyone B. someone C. anyone D. none
( ) 4. Everything ______ ready. We can start now.
A. are B. is C. be D. were
( ) 5. There’s ______ with his eyes. He’s OK.
A. anything wrong B. wrong something C. nothing wrong D. wrong nothing
( ) 6. —The story is so amazing! It’s the most interesting story I’ve ever read.
—But I’m afraid it won’t be liked by ______.
A. everybody B. somebody C. anybody D. nobody
( ) 7. She listened carefully, but heard ______.
A. anyone B. someone C. everyone D. nothing
( ) 8. I agree with most of what you said, but I don’t agree with ______.
A. everything B. anything C. something D. Nothing
( ) 9. —Everyone is here today, ______?
—No, Han Mei isn’t here. She’s ill.
A. isn’t it B. isn’t he C. are they D. isn’t everyone
( ) 10. Everything goes well, ______?
A. is it B. isn’t it C. do they D. doesn’t it
二、完形填空
Dickens, one of the greatest English writers, was born in of the small towns in England.
When Dickens was nine years old, the family moved to London, the of England. There were several younger children in the . Their life was . So Dickens could not go to school.
He didn’t go to until his father came out of prison(监狱). At that time he was already twelve years old. But he did not finish school. Two years , he began to work. He often went to the library to books. He read a lot. Then Dickens wrote lots of novels and stories all his . Dickens over a hundred years ago. people are still reading his books with great interest.
( ) 1. A. any B. one C. some D. a
( ) 2. A. city B. town C. capital D. country
( ) 3. A. school B. class C. city D. family
( ) 4. A. good B. hard C. easy D. wonderful
( ) 5. A. school B. a school C. the school D. schools
( ) 6. A. ago B. before C. later D. since
( ) 7. A. see B. buy C. sell D. read
( ) 8. A. money B. home C. class D. life
( ) 9. A. won B. drew C. read D. died
( ) 10. A. But B. So C. Why D. While
第三讲
Unit2
◆ 知识探究
Step One Reading& Listening
1. Read a story about numbers.
number 此处用作可数名词，意为“数字”。number还可意为“电话号码”。
【拓展】number 还可用作及物动词，意为“标序号，给...编号”
Please number the pictures.
【随时练】 -- Hello, is that Jenny speaking?
-- Sorry, I’m afraid you’ve got the wrong ____________.
A. number B. name C. address D. message
2. Check some Maths problems.
(1) check 及物动词，“检查，核实”
【拓展】 check 的相关短语
check in 登记，检票 check out 办清手续后离开 check up 检验
I will meet Jane at the station, please _________ what time she will arrive.
A. count B.choose C. check D. Catch
(2)problem 可数名词，“问题，难题”
辨析：problem 与question
problem
多指有待解决的问题，特别是疑难的问题或令人疑惑的事，人或情况。常与work out和solve 等搭配
solve the problem 解决问题
deal with the problem 处理问题
question
意思相对广泛，指需要解决或解答的具体问题。常与ask 和answer 搭配
ask questions 问问题
answer the question 回答这个问题
【拓展】
（1）have problems in doing sth. 做某事有困难
（2） No problem. 没问题。
The food safety is a serious _______ in our country. We should try to solve it.
A. subject B.program C. problem D. Opinion
3. The king’s favourite game was chess.
favourite “最喜欢的”，通常位于名词前作定语,没有比较级和最高级形式，在含义上相当于like best
What’s sb’s favourite ...? = What ... do/ dose sb. like best?
【拓展】也可用作名词，意为“最喜欢的人或物”
This book is my favourite.
4. play chess 下象棋 play card 打牌play football，play basketball
（play +棋牌、球类运动）play the piano 弹钢琴 play the violin 拉小提琴 （play + the+乐器）
5. One day, a wise old man came to the palace and the king challenged him to a game.
(1)one day “某一天，有一天”
辨析：one day与some day
one day （过去）有一天，（将来）某一天，用于过去时或将来时
some day （将来）总有一天，只用于将来时
Eg：I think ,y dream will come true one day /some day.我想我的梦想有一天会实现。
Eg：One day, the old man was very ill.有一天，那位老人病的很严重。
（2）challenge sb. to sth. 向某人挑战......
【拓展】challenge sb. to do sth. 向某人挑战做某事，激励某人做某事
(3)wise是形容词，意为“有智慧的”。Eg：A wise woman never shows her smart.
【拓展】：wisdom n.智慧
eg：Experience is the mother of wisdom.经验为智慧之母。
[完成句子]
1. 你为什么要检查卧室呢？
Why do you ________ the bedroom?
2. 聪明的人总是能及时的解决难题。
Someone who is _______always solve the _______ in time.
3. 你想向他挑战吗？
Do you want to ________ him?
4. 这张书桌大约100厘米长
The desk about100_______ ________.
6. The King promised the old man, “ You can have any prize if you win the game.”
①promise sb. sth.
She promised me the book. 她许诺给我这本书。
② promise to do sth.
They promised to come to the pary on time.
他们答应会准时来参加聚会。
③ promise也可以作名词，make a promise意为“许下诺言，答应，保证”
如： My mother made a promise to buy a new bike for me.
我母亲答应给我买一辆新自行车。
( )He promised ________ mis old friend during his stay in Tianjin.
A. see B. seeing C. saw D. to see
④ if，意为“如果”，引导条件状语从句。表示在某条件下，某事很可能发生。
如：If you ask him，he will help you．如果你请他帮忙，他会帮你的。
( Part A) ( Part B)
上述的Part A为条件状语从句，Part B 为主句。从句可以放在主句前，也可以放在主句后。当从句置于主句前时，从句后就加逗号。如：He will help you if you ask him.
【拓展】 If引导的条件状语从句
引导条件状语从句最常用的连词是if,常用的if条件状语从句表示在某种条件下，某件事很可能发生，条件是可能存在的，主句中某种情况发生的概率也是很高的。
Eg：If you ask him, he will help you.如果你请他帮忙，他会帮你的。
Eg：If you have finished the homework you can go home.
另外，If从句还可以表示不可能实现的条件或根本不存在的条件，也就是一种虚拟的条件或假设。从句多用一般过去或过去完成时，表示对现在或过去的一种假设。
Eg：If I were you , I would invite him to the party.
如果我是你，我会邀请他参加聚会。
Eg：I would have arrived much earlier if I had not been caught in the traffic.
要不是交通堵塞，我本会来的早一些。
另外还要注意if条件句的时态搭配有以下几种情况：
（1） if 从句用一般现在时，主句用一般将来时，
eg：If he runs, he’ll get there in time. 如果他跑着去，就会及时赶到那儿。
（2）if 从句用一般现在时，主句用may/might/can,
Eg:If it stops snowing, we can go out.
(3) if 从句用一般现在时，主句用must/should,
Eg :If you want to lose weight, you must/should eat less bread.
(4) if 从句用一般现在时，主句用一般现在时，
Eg：If you heat ice, it turns to water.（也可用will turn） 如果把冰加热，它就会化成水。
(5) if 从句用现在进行时，主句用一般将来时，
Eg：If you are looking for Peter, you’ll find him upstairs. 如果你是在找彼得，上楼就会找到他。
（6） if 从句用现在完成时，主句用一般将来时，
Eg：If you have finished dinner, I’ll ask the waiter for the bill.
如果你吃完了，我就叫服务生来算账。
巧记if用法口诀：
If条件句不一般，几个要点记心间；
条件句，放在前，逗号要放句中间。
条件句表可能，主句多用将来时；
条件句表事实，主句常用现在时。
【随时练】
单项选择
( ) 1. If there no buying and selling of animals, there no killing in nature.
A. is; will he B. will be; will be C. is; is D. will be; is
( ) 2._________, I'll go shopping alone.
A. If she comes B. If she won't come C. If she doesn't come
( )3.The students ____ have a sports meeting this weekend if it _____.
A. won’t; rains B. will; rains
C. won’t; will rain D. are going to; is going to rain
（ ）4.If you _____ to the party, you’ll have a great time
A. will go B. went C. go D. going
（ ）5.–What are you going to do tomorrow?
--We’ll go to the library tomorrow if it ___.
A. isn’t rain B. rain C. won’t rain D. doesn’t rain
（ ）6. What will you do if you _____ to the old folk’s home visit?
A. go B. went C. going D. will go
（ ）7. If I eat ____ food, I’ll be very fat.
A. too many B. many too C. too much D. much too
（ ）8. I’ll give the book to him if he ___ here next Sunday.
A. will come B. comes C. is coming D. came
7. ... And then double the amount for each of the rest of the squares.
rest 此处用作名词，“剩余部分”，the rest 作主语时，谓语动词的单复数要视作具体情况而定，如果所指代的为得数名词，则视为复数；如果所指代的为不可数名词，则视为单数。
the rest of... “......的剩余部分”，作主语时谓语动词的单复数取决于of后面的名词形式。
One of the books is written in Chinese, and the rest are in English.
The rest of the money was donated to charities.
8. Would’t you like gold or silver instead?难道你不想要金子或银子代替？
instead副词，意为“代替；顶替”。
She is very busy. Let’s go instead.她太忙了，还是让我们去吧。
I’ll read newspapers instead of seeing a film.我将看报纸而不是看电影。
辨析：instead 与instead of
instead 副词，代替，顶替，相反 ，位于名首或句末
instead of 介词短语，“代替，而不是”，后接名词，代词或动名词 instead of doing sth. 代替做某事
9. The king quickly realized the problem„国王很快意识到了问题„„
realized是动词realize的过去式。Realize及物动词，意为“认识到；意识到”，常见用法有：
(1)realize+n.
At last she realized her mistakes.最后她意识到了她的错误。
(2)realize+that从句
I realized that it was time to go to school.我意识到该上学了。
(3)realize+疑问句+其他
I don’t think you realize how important this is to her.我认为你没有意识到这对她有多重要。
10. …he would still not have enough rice to put on all the squares!
enough此处用作形容词，意为“充足的；足够的”。可接可数名词或不可数名词。它放到名词前面或后面都可以。
He doesn’t have enough time/time enough to finish the work.他没有足够的时间去完成这项工作。
【拓展】enough做副词时，意为“足够地，十分”，通常用于所修饰的形容
词或副词之后。
Eg：The boy is strong enough to lift the box.这个男孩很强壮，能举起这个箱子。
11. I can teach you how to make more money if you promise to follow my advice,„
如果你承诺采纳我的建议，我可以教你如何去赚更多的钱。
（1）How to make more money是“疑问词+动词不定式（短语）”结构，意为“如何去赚更多的钱”，在句中作teach 的宾语。疑问代词或副词what/who/whom/which/where/when/how后跟动词不定式（短语），常用作动词know/tell/ask/teach等的宾语。
He asked me where to park his car.他问我该把他的车停在哪里。
Could you please teach me how to make a home page?你能教我如何制作主页吗？
(2)advice不可数名词，意为“建议”。表示“一条建议”用a/one piece of advice,表示一些建议用some advice。
Eg：I’ll give you some advice on how to look after your pet dog.
我将给你一些怎样照顾你的宠物的建议。
【拓展】:（1）advice的常用搭配：
Give sb. Some advice/give some advice to sb.给某人一些建议
ask for advice征求意见 follow/take sb’s advice接受某人的建议
（2） advice动词，意为“建议”，后接名词、代词或v.-ing形式作宾语，
也可用于advice sb.(not)to do sth.结构，意为“建议某人不要做某事”。
She advice us to wait (for) one more day.她建议我们再等一天。
【随堂练】单项选择
1.( ) If our government________ pay attention to the safety of food, our health______ in danger.
A. isn’t; is B. doesn’t; will be C. won’t; is D. isn’t; will be
2. ( )My brother want to__________ his classmate to a computer game.
A. Is challenge B. challenge to C. challenge with D. challenge
3. ( )Would you ___________some bread?
A. likes B.like to C likes to D.like
4.( ) I will read newspapers ______ ______ seeing a film.
A. instead B. instead of C. no only D. not to
5. ( )The dining hall is___________ to hold 300 people.
A. enough B. enough small C. small enough D. big enough
6. ( )I don’t know how to keep healthy, can you give me__________?
A. an advice B. lots of advices C. a few advices D. some advice
12. From then on he was not lazy any more.
Not ... Any more 相当于no more, “不再”，但两者位置不同，not ...any more中not常与助动词或情态动词连用，any more位于句末；no more则位于助动词后，实义动词前
辨析：not... any more / no more 与not ...any longer/ no longer
not... any more / no more 多表示数量或程度上“不再”，修饰的动词一般为非延续性动词，表示动作不再发生
not ...any longer/ no longer 多表示在时间或距离上“不再”，修饰的动词一般为延续性动词，表示动作不再延续
I won’t play computer games any more. = I will no more play computer games.
She doesn’t live here any longer. = She no longer lives here.
13. Where the story took place.
辨析：take place 与happen 均表“发生”，均无被动语态。
take place 表示“发生，举行”，一般指非偶然性事件的发生，即这种事件的发生有某种原因或事先的安排 When will the basketball game take place?
happen 表示“发生，碰巧”，一般用于偶然或突发性事件，没有预见性
An accident happened in that street.
【随堂练】
一、首字母填空
1 What’s your telephone n_______?
2 I am a boy. I am my parents’ s_______.
3 Mary isn’t in the classroom. Let’s ask Jenny i__________.
4 He seldom r______to the e mails his friends send him.
5 Can you play c___________?
6 Yesterday, he _______(挑战)me to play that game.
7 Tommy _______(承诺) that he would go to school earlier the next day.
8 My teacher told me that we used g__________to make flour.
9 Xuhaifeng won a g_______medal in shooting in the 1984 Olympics.
10 Mr Wu____________(命令) Simon to close the windows before the storm came.
二、单项选择
1.（ ）8,730,326__________ a large (大的)number.
A. am B.is C. are D. be
2.（ ）The number 366 writes ____________.
A. three hundreds and sixty six B. three hundred and sixty six
C. three hundred and sixty-sux D. three hundred and sixty-six
3.（ ）My father and I like to __________ very much.
A. playing the chess B. play chess
C. playing chess D. play the chess
4. （ ）“I can’t write the words in an hour,” he replied __________ me.
A. / B. to C. for D. of
5.（ ）He ordered the soldier ____________ outside.
A. to stand B. stading C. to standing D. stand
三、完成句子
1.你逼大部分孩子都幸运些，我希望你意识到这一点。
You are luckier than most children, and I hope __________ __________ _________.
2.当我们打网球时，你们其余的人做什么呢？
While we are playing tennis, what will ___________ _____________ __________
you do ?
3. 我喜欢读书而不是跳舞。
I enjoy reading ___________ ____________ _____________.
4.我去过很多地方，如上海、北京、杭州等等。
I have been to many places, such as Shanghai ,Beijing , Hangzhou _______ _________ __________.
Step Two Speaking and Writing
1. Some words have both a strong and a weak form.
both...and...“...和...都...；既...又..；不但...而且...”，用于连接并列的句子成分。
若both...and...连接两个名词或代词作主语，其谓语动词须用复数形式。
Both his father and his uncle are very tall.
2. Our Maths teachers uses a lot of games to help us learn.
use...to do sth. “用...做某事”，相当于use...for doing sth.
【拓展】use 可作名词，“用处，作用”
It’s no use doing sth. 做某事没有用。
make (good) use of sth. （充分）利用某物
3. He makes the class really interseting.
make+宾语+形容词 “使某人/某物...”
The present made my sister happy.
【随堂练】
一、 单项选择。
1. ( )– We have ____________ to eat tonight.
--Great! Thank you, Mum.
A. special something B. special anything
C. nothing special D. something special
2. ( )– The exam was very easy, wasn’t it?
-- Yes. But I don’t think ____________ could pass it.
A. somebody B. anybody C. nobody D. everybody
3. ( )Would you like ___________ water ?
A. some B. any C. a D. an
4. ( )I have an ___________ dog. It is very clever.
A. amaze B. amazed C. amazing D. amazes
5.( ) The traffic here ____________ quite heavy because more and more people are buying cars.
A. is B. are C. make D. makes
二、书面表达
在阳光雨露里，我已升高、长壮。但这还不是全部，长大还就包括什么？是关心，帮助同学？是体贴，理解父母？是感恩，回报亲朋师长？还是......成长的点点滴滴，久久不能忘记？请以I am not a child any more为题，记叙你在学习生活中经历的一件或两件事，表明你已经不再是一个小孩子。
要求：1、请根据所给题目，用英语写一篇短文，不少于80词。2、语言流畅，书写规范，卷面整洁 3、文中不得使用你的真实姓名，校名。
I am not a child any more
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
范文： I am not a child any more
I have changed a lot during the past three years. I used to be weak and short. But
now, I am strong and as tall as my father. The most important thing is that 1 have learned to care about others.
It was a Wednesday evening. When I went back home, no one was-in. So I cooked the meal. I didn't know my mother was ill until my parents came back from the hospital. They both said the meal was very delicious, although it tasted salty. At bedtime, I fetched hot water for my mother to wash feet. My mother said, "Dear, you have really grown up. " It was the first time that I had realized I was not a child any more.
Step Three More practice
1、Before the invention of written numbers, people used many different ways to count things.
invention:n.发明
相关词invent:v.发明 Inventor:n.发明家
练一练（用所给词的适当形式填空）
Edison was a famous_____________and he___________more than one thousand__________ in his
life. （invent）
2、Before the invention of written numbers, people used many different ways to count things.
use sth to do sth.用..来做..
eg: In ancient times, people used stone to kill animals for food.
拓展：
used to do sth: 过去常常做某事
be/get used to doing sth:习惯于做某事
【随堂练】
单项选择
1. He has been in China for two months, and now he ___________ the life here.
A. used to B.uses C. is used to D.is using
2. He_________up after 8 o’clock, but now he__________up early.
A.used to get;uses to get B.used to get; is used to getting
C.used to getting; used to get D.used to getting; is used to get
3、They used them to count things like the days of the month,the amount of food and the number of animals they had.
1.the number of:….的数量(强调数目)，其后接可数名词复数形式
2.the amount of:…的数量(强调总量)，其后多接不可数名词
eg: the amount of snow降雪量 the amount of money钱的数量
the number of boys男孩的数量 the number of chairs 椅子的数量
4、This developed into tools like the abacus.
develop.v.发展
相关词 developed: adj. 发展的，发达的
developing: adj.发展中的
development: n.发展
5、However, the could only count small numbers in this way.
in this way
用这种方法，这样
Only in this way can we do better in English.
in the way
挡道，妨碍
Look, a car is in the way.
on the way
在路上，在途中
I met my uncle on the way to school.
by the way
顺便说一下
By the way, what time is it?
6、They often put the tokens on pieces of string so that they could carry them around easily.
so that 此处引导目的状语从句，“为的是，以便”，从句中常有can, could, may,might等情态动词。 so that 从句可以转换成in order +that 从句 或 in order to do sth. 结构
I work hard so that I could finish my work on time.
= I work hard in order that I could finish my work on time.
= I work hard in order to finish my work on time.
【拓展】so that 也可以引导结果状语从句，“结果，因此”，该从句前常用逗号与主句隔开。
It rained heavily, so that we had to stay at home.
so that
可引导目的状语从句，“以便，为了”；也可引导结果状语从句，“结果，因此”
The little boy saved money so that he could buy his mother a present.
so ... that
引导结果状语从句，“如此...以至于...”
The football fams were so excited that they cried out.
You’d better take the map with you ______ you won’t get lost.
A. as long as B. as soon as C. now that D. so that
【随时练】
一、用方框所给短语的适当形式完成句子。
different ways, at first , after that, begin to , count… things, so that, develp into, lead … to , carry around , made from
1. Some of them still live in ____________.
2. What __________ you __________ change your mind?
3. You ___________ all the ___________ to find how many there are.
4. I ___________ memories of my homeland ___________ with me.
5. _____________, the words didn’t mean anything to Helen.
6. Their affair did not ____________ a lasting relationship.
7. She often has breakfast at six fifty, ______________ she goes to the factory by bus.
8. The glass is ____________ sand.
9. It ____________ snow when he came out of the warm office.
10. Miss Wang speaks aloud __________ all the students can hear her.
二、单项选择
1. ( )I didn’t go out on Sunday. I stayed at home ___________.
A. however B. but C. instead D. instead of
2. ( )Long ago, people wrote numbers __________ many different ways.
A. at B. in C. with D. by
3. ( )I found it difficult to communicate with him ___________.
A. at first B. first C. on first D. to first
4. ( )Everything begins ___________ in spring.
A. to grow B. grow C. grows D. grew
5. ( )What’s your sweater ___________ ?
A. made of B. make of C.make from D. made in
6. ( )Please open the window ____________ we can breathe fresh air.
A. if B. and C. so that D. such that
7. ( )Working hard ___________ English can lead ___________ have a good job.
A. at; in B. in; at C. in; for D. at; to
8.( ) I phoned again and again, but there was no ____________.
A. answer B. question C. telephone D. man
三、句型转换
1. Jenny doesn’t agree to the plan. (改为同义句)
Jenny _____________ with the plan.
2. He is too excited to do it. (改为同义句)
He is _____________ excited ____________ he ____________ do it.
3. Return my money, please. (改为否定句)
Please ____________ return my money.
第四讲
单元语法——数词
一、基数词
（一）基数词的构成最基本的基数词如下表
1 one 2 two 3 three 4 four 5 five 6 six 7 seven 8 eight 9 nine 10 ten 11 eleven
12 twelve 13 thirteen 14 fourteen 15 fifteen 16 sixteen 17 seventeen 18 eighteen 19 nineteen 20 twenty 30 thirty 40 forty 50 fifty 60 sixty 70 seventy 80 eighty 90 ninety
100 a/one hundred 1, 000 a/one thousand
1, 000, 000 a/one million 1, 000, 000, 000 a/ one billion
（二）其他基数词的构成：
(1)21 ~99的两位数，在十位数和个位数之间加连字符构成。如： 53 fifty-three
(2)101—999的三位数，由hundred加and再加两位数或末位数。如：
325 three hundred and twenty-five
（三）基数词的用法
(1)当hundred, thousand, million, billion等和of连用，表示粗略的数目时，须用复数。
如： hundreds of people数以百计的人
但如果hundred, thousand, million, billion等词前有具体数词或several时，须用单数：
six hundred people 600人
(2)表示“几十年代”或“几十岁”时，用逢十的基数词的复数。如：
in the thirties在30年代 in his fifties在他50多岁时
(3)与基数词合成的复合形容词，其中的名词用单数。如：
a three-month-old baby三个月大的婴儿 a five-year plan一个五年计划
二、序数词
序数词一般以与之相应的基数词加词尾-th构成，但要注意一些特殊形式。
（一）阿拉伯数字基数词序数词序数词缩略式
1 one first 1st 2 two second 2nd 3 three third 3rd
5 five fifth 5th 8 eight eighth 8th 9 nine ninth 9th
12 twelve twelfth 12th 20 twenty twentieth 20th
21 twenty-one twenty-first 21st 22 twenty-two twenty-second 22nd
23 twenty-three twenty-third 23 rd
（二）序数词的用法
①作主语 e.g. The third of the month was a holiday.
②作表语 e.g. Who was the third?
③作定语 e.g. We live on the fifth floor.
④作宾语 e.g. I was among the first to learn of this.
⑤作同位语 e.g. Who is that man, the first in the front row?
⑥作状语 e.g. When did you first meet him?
注：序数词在使用时，通常前面要加定冠词the ；但是如果序数词前出现不定冠词a 或an时,则表示“再……", “又……"。
You can do it a second time. 你可以再做一次。
（三）特别提示
以y结尾的基数词构成序数词时，先把y变为i, 再加-eth。
其他序数词的构成
(1)几十几及以上的序数词，其中十位数或百位数、千位数等用基数词，只有个位数才用序数词。如： 128th: one hundred and twenty-eighth 752nd: seven hundred and fifty-second
(2)hundred, thousand, million的序数词均在基数词后加-th构成，hundredth, thousandth, millionth
三、数词的应用
（一）倍数表示法
1. 一倍用once两倍用twice或double。
例如： This year we have produced twice as much corn as we did last year.
我们今年生产的玉米是去年的两倍。
She is double my age. 她的年龄是我的两倍。
2. 三倍或三倍以上用数词+times，可以译为"是......的几倍"；"比......大/高/长......几倍"等等。
① 用"主语+谓语+...times + the size(或amount, length...)+ of +被比较对象"表示。例如： The size of your room is five times the size of mine.
你房间的面积是我房间面积的五倍。
② 用"主语+谓语+...times + 形容词（副词）的比较级 + than +被比较对象"表示。例如： Your bag is twice bigger than mine. 你的包比我的大两倍。
③ 用"主语+谓语+...times + 形容词+ (n.) + as + 被比较对象"表示。
例如： Your book is three times as thick as mine. 你的书比我的书厚三倍。
（二）分数表示法
(1)分子用基数词，分母用序数词，分子大于1时，分母用复数。如：
one-fourth(a quarter)四分之一，two-fifths五分之二
(2)分子与分母之间加in, 分子在前，分母在后，分子、分母都用基数词。如：
one in ten十分之一，four in five五分之四
(3)分子与分母之间加out of, 分子在前，分母在后，分子、分母都用基数词，如：
one out of ten十分之一，four out of five五分之四
（三）小数表示法
小数的表示法，小数点前的部分同其他数词一样，小数点用point, 小数点后面的数都把它读成个位数，如：
21. 25表示为twenty-one point two five 136. 45表示为one hundred and thirty-six point four five
（四）百分数表示法
表示百分数直接将数词放在单词percent前面。如：
twenty percent百分之二十 seventy-five percent百分之七十五
特别提示
分数和百分数后面不能直接跟名词或代词，而应是“分数或百分数 + of + 冠词或限定词 + 名词或代词”，其谓语动词与of后面的名词在人称和数上保持一致。如：
Two-fifths of the money was spent on books. 五分之二的钱用在买书上。
（五）时刻表示法
1. 表示整点 用基数词加o'clock构成，o'clock也可省略，介词用at.
8: 00读作：eight o'clock （或eight）
2. 表示“几点过几分” 用past, 但分数必须在半小时以内（包括半小时）。
8: 05读作：five past eight （或eight five或eight o five）
8: 15读作：fifteen past eight （或a quarter past eight或eight fifteen）
8: 30读作：half past eight （或eight thirty）
3. 表示“几点差几分” 用介词to, 但分数必须在半小时以上（不包括半小时）
8: 40读作：twenty to nine（或eight forty）
8: 45读作：fifteen to nine（或a quarter to nine或eight forty-five）
8: 55读作：five to nine（或eight fifty-five）
（六）编号表示法
1. 基数词和序数词可以表示事物的编号。着重编号，用“名词 + 基数词”；着重顺序，用“序数词 + 名词”。如：
Lesson One = the first lesson第一课 Chapter Four = the fourth chapter第四章
2. 电话号码读法。如： Tel. No. 797-7936或Telephone number
797-7936读作：Telephone number seven nine seven seven nine three six
3. 其他号码读法。如： Room 111 111房间（读作：room one one one）
Bus (No. ) 102 102路车（读作：bus (number） one o two)
page 176第176页（读作：page one hundred and seventy-six或page one seventy-six或page one seven six）
（七）基数词可以表示算式。
①加法 “加”用plus,and或 add表示；“等于”用is,make,equal等词表示.
1+2=3 One plus two is three.
One and two is equal to three.
One added to two equals three.
②减法 “减“用minus或take from表示。
9-3=6
Nine minus three is six.
Take three from nine and the remainder is six.
Three(taken) from nine is six.
③乘法 “乘”用time（动词）或multiply表示。
2×3=6
Two times three is/are
six.
Multiply two by three,we get six.
Two multiplied three makes six.
④ 除法 “除”用divide的过去分词形式表示；
15÷3=5
Fifteen divided by three is five.
【随堂练】
一、基础题
( ) 1. In February, there are only _________ days.
A. twenty nine B. twenty-nineth C. twenty-nine D. twenty eight
( ) 2. The number 4,123 is read _______.
A. four thousand one hundred and twenty-three
B. four thousand and one hundred twenty-three
C. four thousand and a hundred and twenty-three
D. four thousands a hundred and twenty-three
( ) 3. Four ________ two is two.
A. plus B. minus C. times D. divided by
( ) 4. Three ________ five is eight.
A. plus B. minus C. times D. divided by
( ) 5. Three ________ seven is twenty-one.
A. plus B. minus C. times D. divided by
( ) 6. Forty-two ________ seven is six.
A. plus B. minus C. times D. divided by
( ) 7. The train from Shanghai will arrive ________.
A. in quarter past six B. in a quarter past six
C. at quarter past six D. at a quarter past six
( ) 8. Which is the car that he drives? It's ________.
A. fifty two B. the fifty-two cars C. the car fifty four D. the fifty-fourth car
( ) 9. Our school is not very big. There are only ________ students.
A. nine hundreds of B. nine hundred C. nine hundreds D. nine hundred of
二、提高题
( ) 1. A _______ boy can sing the English song very well.
A. ten-year-old B. ten years old C. ten-year-old D. fifth years old
( ) 2. ________, Coca-Cola began to enter China's market.
A. In 1970's B. In 1970s C. In the 1970s' D. In the 1970s
( ) 3. There was no bus in that small town. We had a ________.
A. ten miles walk B. ten-mile walk C. ten mile's walk D. tenth mile walk
( ) 4. ________ of them are dining at school.
A. Twelve B. Twelfth C. The twelve D. the 12th
( ) 5. The old professor still works hard though he is _________.
A. in his sixty B. in his sixties C. in sixties D. in the sixty
( ) 6. Every year ________ watch NBA on TV.
A. million people B. millions of people
C. millions people D. million of people
( ) 7. ___ of the world's books and newspapers are written in English.
A. Three quarters B. Three quarter C. Thirds four D. Threes fourth
( ) 8. The girl wanted to sing____ song in English.
A. the others B. a second C. other D. the second
( ) 9. Now let me have____.
A. the third try B. a third try C. third try D. this third try
( ) 10. It took me ________ to find out the key to the drawer.
A. one and half hours B. one and a half hours
C. one and a half hour D. one and half hour
三、中考演练
1. ( )（2013年广东，29）— Excuse me, sir. Here’s a package for Lin Tao. Which room does he live in? —________.
A.308 Room B. Room 308 C. The Room 308 D. The 308 Room
2. ( )（2013年佛山，24）Wang Yaping will become China’s ______ woman astronaut into space after Liu Yang.
A. two B. second C. the second
3. ( )（2013年深圳，6）-Is first impression very important?
---Yes, it is, because you never get___ second chance to make___ first impression.
A. /, the B. a, the C. the, the D. a, a
4. ( )（2013年黄冈，35）——What should we do now,Mr.Clark?
——Please turn to Page_____and look at the_____picture.
A.Twelve;fifth B.Twelfth;fifth C.Twelve;five D.Twelfth;five
5. ( )（2012年广州，29）—How was your weekend?
—Great!It was my grandfather’s ______ birthday. We enjoyed ourselves.
A. seventy B. seventieth C. the seventieth D. seventeenth
6. ( ) (2012年深圳，11）—what does the fresh juice contain?
—______ of the juice ______ orange. It’s very nice.
A.Four-fifth;are B.Four-fifths; are
C.Four-fifth; is D.Four-fifths; is
7、( ) (2012年佛山，34) Three students ran faster than Lily in the race. Lily was ________.
A. the fourth B. four C. the third
8、( ) (2012年湛江，23)—Is Beijing a city with a long history?
— Of course. And after the Olympic Games, _______ people came to Beijing for a visit during the vacation.
A. thousands of B. thousand
C. five thousands D. five thousand of
9、( ) (2011梅州，32)——has Mary been back?
——Not yet. She will come back________ the evening of June_______.
A. at; first B. to; thirtieth C. on; the twelfth D. on; the nineteen
10、( ) (2011广东，29)after the Asian Games, ________ people came to Guangzhou for a visit during holidays.
A. thousand B. thousands of C. five thousands D. five thousand of
11、( ) (2010汕尾，26) this is _________ lesson, so I don’t know all your names.
A. our first B. our the first C. the our first D. the first our
12、( ) (2010中山，28)________ is the most difficult of ________.
A. Lesson Eight; Book Three B. The lesson eight; the book three
C. The eighth lesson; the three book D. the eight lesson; the third book
第五讲
Unit3
◆ 知识探究
Step one Getting ready & Reading
课文讲解
1 Listen to a woman making a phone order.听一位女士电话购物。
Order n.订货；订购。 make an order 订购。如：
Please make an order for a new sofa and a tea table.请订购一个新沙发和茶几。
回顾：order 还可表示“命令”的意思。如：
This is an order! 这是命令!
2 Learn how to compare things by using the comparative of adjectives.学习如何用形容词的比较级来对比事物。
Compare v.比较；对比。Compare…with… 把···与···相比。如：
Compare this picture with that one and see which is better.
把这幅画和那幅画相比，看看哪幅更好。
3 We use the computer for typing. 我们用电脑来打字。
Type v.打字。如：
I’ll ask Miss white to type the letter. 我会让怀特小姐把这封信打出来。
Type 还可作名词，表示“种类；类型”的意思。如：
A type of 一种
4 Computers may work as doctors. 电脑可以当医生。
Work as 从事···工作。如：
My brother works as an engineer.我哥哥是工程师。
5 You may be unaware of them. 你可能没意识到这些。
Be unaware of 没意识到；未察觉。如：
He was unaware of the truth. 他没意识到真想。
拓展：be aware of 意识到；察觉到
6 You depend on computers more than you realize. 你依赖电脑的程度比你知道的更多。
Depend on 依靠。如：
Children depend on their parents.孩子依靠父母。
7 They can calculate at a faster speed than we can and almost never give wrong answers. 它们的计算得比我们快，而且几乎从不出错。
Speed n. 速度。如：
At a fast / full speed 快速 / 全速
At a speed of 120 kilometers per hour 以每小时120公里的速度
8 In addition, computers can do important jobs like operating railways and flying planes and spaceships.此外，电脑可以做很重要的工作，如铁路系统的控制、飞机飞船的操作。
In addition 除···以外（还）。如：
He does well in all his subjects.In addition,he is good at playing sports.
他各门功课都很出色。此外，他还擅长各项运动。
9. However, one day computers may be able to do a better job than human beings.
Be able to 意为“能，能够”，后接动词原形。
Tom isn’t able to come because he is ill.
辨析be able to与can
be able to
表示有能力，往往是经过努力而获得的能力
有人称和数的变化
可用于多种时态
can
没有人称和数的变化
只有一般现在时和一般过去时的两种时态
表示身体或精神上自身具备的能力，还可以表示请求、允许、推测
9. Some young people always need help from their parents.
Need作实义动词讲，意为需要
Need to do sth “需要做某事”，主语通常是人
We need to tell him the truth.
Need doing sth “需要做某事”，主语通常是物
The flowers need watering.
Need作情态动词时，没有人称和数的变化，后接动词原形，主要用于否定句或疑问句中。
10. We had fun and learnt something new as well.
Have fun意为“玩得开心，过得愉快”，相当于have a good/great/wonderful time或enjoy oneself,此处fun是不可数名词，意为“玩笑，娱乐，乐趣”
The children are having fun playing in the park.
As well意为“也”。通常放句末，相当于too.
I can speak Chinese and I can speak English as well.
11. ...but it works at a much faster speed than my old one.
At介词，意为“（速度）以...”。
At a speed of以...的速度 at high/low speed以高速/低速
At top/full speed以全速
Much faster意为“快得多”。“much+形容词/副词的比较级”意为“......得多”
I’m much taller than you.
常见的用于修饰比较级的单词或短语有much, even, a little, a bit等。
Step two-Listening 讲解
Price each单价
Price名词，意为“价钱价格”。询问价格用“What’s the price of...?”，相当于“How much is/are...?”。
1） 表示价格高用“high”,表示价格低用“low”。
The price of the book is very high.
1） expensive “昂贵的，花钱多的”，表示物品“贵”；表示物品“贱”用cheap（廉价的，便宜的）。它们的主语必须是货物、物品本身。
This watch is expensive.
【随堂练】：
(一) 单项选择：
1 This computer is ________ than that one.
A. expensive B. more expensive
C. much expensive D.most expensive
( ) 2 Mary depended ________ her grandparents after her parents died in the accident
A. on B. in C. by D. with
( ) 3 Lucy’s mother ________ a teacher in a big school. She is kind to all her students.
A. works out B. works as C. works in D. works on
( ) 4 Sam is an excellent engineer. ________ ,he is a good footballer.
A. in trouble B. in time C. in addition D. in future
( ) 5 We use the mouse for ________ the computer.
A. control B. controls C. controlled D. controlling
(二) 单词拼写。
1 —How fast can the car run?
—It can run at a s ________ of 150 kilometres an hour.
1 We d ________ on each other because we are good friends.
2 These ants are so t ________ that people are always unaware of them.
3 Usr your b ________ , and you’ll find a way.
4 My seventy-year-old grandpa is learning to t ________ with the computer.
(三) 完成句子。
1 人们生病时要依靠医生。
People have to ________ ________ doctors when they are ill.
2 此外，李老师还是个灌篮高手。
________ ________, Mr Li is a great basketball player.
3 你父亲从事什么工作？
What does your father ________ ________?
3 我没察觉到这个错误的答案。
I ________ ________ ________ the wrong answer.
5 如果你比较一下这些文章，你就会知道谁写得最好。
________ you ________ these articles,you’ll know writes the best.
(四) 读课文，选择正确答案。
( ) 1 The first computers appeared ________.
A. in 1940 B. before cars C. in the 1940s
( ) 2 Now computers are becoming ________.
A. smaller B.less C.bigger
( ) 3 Computers can do ________ for human beings.
A. nothing B. something C. anything
( ) 4 People move the ________ to control the computer.
A. mouse B. keyboard C. monitor
( ) 5 Computers aren’t cleverer than us because we can ________.
A. calculate faster than them B.always give right answers C. produce new ideas
Step three-Speaking ＆ Writing
1 What do you think of computers?
What do you think of….= How do you like……? 你觉得…..怎么样？
-What do you think of your trip?
-Great! We have a good time!
【中考链接】
你认为我们的校规和班规怎样？
____ do you ____ _____ our school rules and class rules?
2 How often do you use the computer?
How often “多久一次”
回答的时候用频度副词always，often……或者频度副词短语 once/twice a week.
-How often do they play ping-pong?
-Once a week.
【辨析】
How often 多久一次，指频率
How long 多长时间，用for或者是since回答 - How long did you stay here?
-For three days
How soon 还要多长时间才，多用于将来时， - How soon will they come back?
用in+一段时间回答 -In two days.
【中考链接】
-_________ do you go to library?
- Once a week.
3 How much time do you spend playing computer games every week?
How much 多少，提问不可数名词的数量，还可以询问价钱。
How much money do you have?
How much water is there in the glass?
【辨析】
Spend 主语是人 spend on sth./spend …in doing sth.
Pay 主语是人 pay for sth./ pay sb. for sth.
Take 主语是it It takes sb. some time to do sth.
Cost 主语是物 sth. costs sb. some money
【中考链接】
I _______ some of my free time playing basketball for my school team.
A spend B cost C take D pay.
4 popular 流行的，受欢迎的。可以做定语或者是表语。做定语时，在口语中缩写为pop.
Be popular with 受到…..的欢迎
Ice cream is popular with children.
【中考链接】
Mobile phones are ______(流行的，普通的) in the modern world.
5 However, we have another model--- the C 4095
Another 另外的，又一。在此处做形容词，也可以做代词。通常用于三者或者是三者以上以及不确定中的另一个.‘the other’指的是两者中的另一个。
Let’s find another way to work out the problem.
Here are two rules. One is short, and the other is short.
【中考链接】
- Could we see each other at 9 o’clock tomorrow morning.
- Sorry, Let’s make it ______ time.
A other’s B the other C another D other
6 Look forward to your replay.
Look forward to……希望，盼望 其中to 是介词，后面跟动词的ing形式。
I’m always looking forward to buying a new car.
【随堂练】
一 写出下列形容词的比较级和最高级
1 silly ______ _______ 2 happy _____ _______
3 well ______ ________ 4 beautiful ______________ ______________
5 careful _____________ _____________ 6 thin _____________ __________
7 heavy __________ ___________ 8 bad __________ ___________
9 big __________ _____________ fat __________ _____________
二 根据提示完成句子
1 那件衬衣多少钱？
________ ________ _______ ________the skirt?
2 他每天要花一个小时玩电脑游戏。
He _______ over an hour _______ computer games every day.
3 –一杯咖啡怎么样？
-好的，谢谢你！
- ______ ______ ______ a cup of coffee?
- Yes, please. Thank you.
4 –哪一位是你爸爸?
-穿白衬衣的那位男士。
- ______ _____ is your father?
--The man in a white shirt.
5-你觉得今晚的电影怎么样？
-很一般
-______ _____ you _____ ______ the movie tonight?
-It’s just so-so
三 单项选择
( ) 1 --- What do you think of the two backpacks?
---________ of them are very nice.
A Either B Both C Each D All
( ) 2 It usually ______ Mum about half an hour to cook supper.
A pays B takes C spends D costs
( ) 3 Daisy is such a good daughter that she _____ most of her spare time with her parents.
A spends B costs C takes D affords
( ) 4 -_______ does you cousin go to the gym?
-Twice a week.
A How long B How often C How soon D How much
( ) 5 -______ are you leaving for Beijing?
- In a couple of days.
A How far B How often C How soon D How long
( ) 6 – Jenny, I need some milk .
-Ok. Mum. ______ do you need?
A How much B How many C How often D How long
( ) 7 -______is your father?
- A bank clerk. He works in a bank near my home?
A Where B How C What D Which
( ) 8 -______ does your new friend look like?
A How B Who C What C Where
( ) 9 -______is Jeremy Lin.
- He is a famous Harvard-educated, Asian-American NBA basketball player.
A Where B What C Why D How old
( ) 10 - _______ have you been married?
-For twenty years.
A How long B How far C How soon D How often
四 书面表达
电脑已经成为生活中不可或缺的工具了。 以computer 为题，写一篇约60的词
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
例文：
Computer is a wonderful machine. It’s a great invention in many years. It develops very quickly. The smallest computer is as big as a notebook. We call it pocket computer. Computer becomes more and more important in many ways. It has touched the lives of everyone, even people in faraway villages. It helps us to do with all kinds of information and we get knowledge from it. It can give us a lot of fun..
Step four-More Practice 讲解
1 The students played computer games on the Internet all day Saturday without stopping to drink, eat or sleep.
without 介词 “没有，缺乏”. 后接名词，代词以及动名词，多作伴随状语
He left without a word.
Stop to do sth. 停下来去做另一件事。 The girl start to cry.
Sop doing sth. 停止做某事 The girl stopped crying.
2 I hope we can work together to stop students from spending too much time playing computer games.
Stop sb. from doing sth. 阻止某人做某事
Let’s stop the children from playing near the lake.
【中考链接】
While we were running on the playground, Jack suddenly stopped _____and lay on the ground, so we all stopped _______ what was wrong with him.
A to run; to see B running; seeing C running; to see
【随堂练】
一 用形容词的正确形式填空
1 Autumn is _______________(good) season in a year.
2 The sun is ________(big) than the Moon.
3 We are twins. I’m ________(old) than her.
4 Lucy’s cake is ________(small) than Lily’s
5 Who is _______(tall), Ann, Meimei or Mary.
6 The basket is ________(heavy) of all. Let me carry it.
7 That cinema has ________(bad) quality in town.
8 Don’t clean those windows. They are very ________(high)
9 They are all in Grade Two. I’m in Grade One. I;m _______(young)
10 Today is a fine day. It is ________(fine) in this week.
二 根据汉语提示完成句子
1 他很饿，又吃了两片面包。
He was hungry and ate ______ ______ pieces of bread.
2 我期待着参观故宫
I’m ______ ______ ________ ______ the Palace Museum.
3 非常感谢你能来参加我的生日聚会
Thanks very much ______ _______ to my birthday party.
4 他立刻匆匆忙忙的跑出去，一句话也没有说。
He hurried out immediately _____ _____ a word.
5 他让我们停下来休息一会儿。
Let’s _____ _____ ____ a rest.
三 选择题
( ) 1 – Is New Zealand a big country?
- No, New Zealand only has two island. One is North Island,______ is South Island.
A other B the other C another D the others
( ) 2 - I’m looking forward to ________ my parents soon. What about you?
-Me too.
A seeing B see C saw
( ) 3 Kate, thanks for ______ me ______ my English.
A helping; to B to help; with C helping; with
( ) 4 My dream hometown hometown is an amazing place ______ any pollution.
A with B without C out D in
( ) 5 ---Dad, why must I stop _______ computer games?
---For your health, my boy.
A play B to play C to playing D playing
( ) 6 --- What’s the matter with Della?
--- Well, her parents wouldn’t allow her to go to the party, but she still ________
A hopes so B hopes to C hopes not D hopes for
( ) 7 --- It’s reported that it will rain hard next Sunday.
---- ______. We are planning to go boating that day.
A I don’t think so B I hope so C I’m afraid not D I hope not
( ) 8 As you know It’s our duty to _______ people from hurting animals in danger.
A stop B save C help D protect
( ) 9 – The meat is _____ delicious.
- Yes, but don’t eat______.
A too much, too much B much too, too much
C too much, much too D much too, much too
( ) 10 He is very popular and ________ tourists visit it year by year.
A more and more B fewer and fewer C less and less D more or less
第六讲
单元语法——形容词副词
一般来说，中文意思是“……的”的词是形容词，而中文意思是“……地”的词是副词。形容词和副词的比较级和最高级是小升初考试的重点之一。
一. 形容词:
1. 概述: 形容词是用以修饰名词或某些代词,表示人或事物的性质,特征或状态的. eg: This is a small noon.
多个形容词作定语一般遵循下面的规则:限(冠词, 物主代词, 指示代词, 数词等) 观(描述)形(大小, 形状等)龄(年龄, 新旧等)色(色彩)国(国籍, 出处等)
二. 副词: 表示行为特征或性状的词叫副词, 副词主要用来修饰动词, 形容词, 副词或其他结构.
副词的基本特征
①副词是表示行为或状态特征的词，在句子中属于修饰性词类。
②大多数副词是用形容词加后缀－ly构成的。 Eg: quickly slowly bravely
以-y结尾的形容词，现将y改成i，再加-ly。 Eg: happy-----happily angry-----angrily
有些副词没有特殊词尾。 Eg: late, often, here, quite, never, very
③有些副词与形容词形式相同。 Eg: late, early, high, long, fast
④只有可以分成比较级的副词才能有比较级和最高级形式，eg: fast ,easily等。 像only, really, here, there则不可能有比较级，因为它们是不可分级的。
一、形容词、副词比较级和最高级的意义
英语中的形容词和副词，在句子里表示“比较……”、“最……”时，要用特别的形式，即：比较级和最高级。原来的形式称为原级。
如： long longer longest
原级 比较级 最高级
1．The black pen is very long. 黑色的钢笔很长。
2．The blue pen is longer than the black one. 蓝色的钢笔比黑色的长。
3．The red pen is the longest of the three. 红色的钢笔是三支中最长的。
二、 形容词、副词的比较级和最高级的构成规则
单音节词和少数双音节词（如以y结尾的词）以加词尾-er,-est 的方式构成，在加词尾时要注意：
类型
构成法
例词
一般单音节词
直接加词尾-er,-est
small, samller, smallest
以-e或-ee结尾的词
加-r, -st
large, larger, largest
free, freer, freest
以“辅音字母+y”结尾的词
变y为i，再加词尾-er，-est
busy, busier, biggest
heavy, heavier, heaviest
以一个辅音字母结尾的重读闭音节词
先双写这个辅音字母，再加-er, -est
big, bigger, biggest
thin, thinner, thinnest
大部分双音节词和多音节词都在其前加more方式构成：
原级
比较级
最高级
important
more important
most important
difficult
more diffcult
most difficult
useful
more useful
most useful
注：有少数单音节的形容词，通常以加 more, most 的方法构成比较级和最高级，
如：pleased, tired, fond, glad等。
三、形容词、副词比较级的用法
表示两者间的比较用比较级。其常见句式有：
1．“A + be +形容词比较级 + than + B” 意思为“A比B更……”。
如：This tree is taller than that one. 这棵树比那棵树高。
注意：
① 在含有连词than的比较级中，前后的比较对象必须是同一范畴，即同类事物之间的比较。
②在比较级前面使用much，表示程度程度“强得多”。
如：A watermelon is much bigger than an apple.
③ very, quite一般只能修饰原级，不能修饰比较级。
2．“become + 形容词比较级 + and + 形容词比较级”是“变得越来越……”的意思，and连接同一个形容词的比较级。
如：It becomes warmer and warmer when spring comes. 春天来了，天气变得越来越暖和了。
注：表示“越来越……”时，若比较级是“原级 + er”构成的，则常用“比较级 + and + 比较级”形式；若比较级是“more + 原级”构成的，需用“more and more + 原级形式”。
如：Our school is becoming more and more beautiful. 我们的学校变得越来越美丽。
3．在含有or的选择疑问句中，如果有两者供选择，前面的形容词要用比较级形式。
如：Who is taller,Tim or Tom? 谁更高，Tim还是Tom?
四、形容词、副词的最高级的用法
1. Spring is the best season of the year. 春天是一年中最好的季节。
2. She is the youngest in the class. 她是班里最年轻的。
句型：A+动词+the+形容词最高级+of（in）… 表示三者或三者以上（人或事物）的比较，其中有一个在某一方面超过其他几个时，用最高级。最高级前面一般要加定冠词the，后面可带of（in）短语来说明比较的范围。
1. Tom is the happiest of us all. 汤姆是我们当中最幸福的。
2. This park is the most beautiful of the three. 这个花园是这三个中最漂亮的。
of…和in…的区别
1.“of+复数”表示“在……之中的”；“在……中”
of the four…… 在四个之中 of all（people） 在所有的人之中 of all the boys在所有的男孩中 of us 在我们之中 of all things 在所有的事情当中
2.“in+范围、场所”译为“在……之中”；“在……之内” in the house 在家中 in China 在中国 in the world 在世界上 in our school 在我们学校 in my family 在我们家需注意的最高级用法 America is one of the most
important countries for China. 对中国而言，美国是最重要的国家之—。 My father is the tallest in my family. 在我家里，我父亲最高。
1.one of the +最高级，表示“是最……之一者”
Shanghai is one of the most beautiful cities in China. 上海是中国最美丽的城市之—。
Our city is one of the safest cities in the world. 我们城市是世界上最安全的城市之—。
One of the most important languages is English 最重要的语言之一是英语。
注意：1.one of the +最高级，后面要加上名词的复数，即为“one of the +最高级+复数名词”
2.“most+复数名词”、“most of the+复数名词）或most of+代词，表示“大多数，大部分的……”
Most of the boysare good. 大多数的男孩是好样的。
Most of（his books） them were written here. 他的大部分书是在这儿写的。
3.最高级的表示方法 我们可以用原级、比较级、最高级三种方式来表达最高级，总结如下： 她是她们班最好的学生。
最高级：She is the best in her class.
比较级：She is better than any other student in her class.
No other student in her class is better than she.
原级： No other student in her class is as good as she.
比较which和what
在一定数目的范围内做选择时用which，从不定数中做选择时用what，但有时并没有区分得那么清楚。左下例句是询问三者以上，所以用which。
Which（Who）is +the +最高级？ 意指三个以上的事物或人当中“哪一个（人）最为～呢？”
Which is the biggest of the five apples?
这五个苹果中哪一个最大？
The first one（is）. 第一个。
Which is the heaviest, the horse, the sheep or the elephant?
马、羊和大象，哪一个最沉？
The elephant（is）.大象。
五、注意
形容词最高级前一定要有定冠词the，而副词最高级前则不需要。
eg：What animals run fastest?
They run fastest in the world.
【随堂练】
一、按要求写单词
1. slow(反义词) ____________
2. cheap(反义词)__________
3. fast(反义词) ____________
4. plane(同义词)___________
5. much（比较级）__________
6. bus(复数) ____________
7. cost(同义词)___________
8. take(反义词) ____________
二、写出下列形容词的比较级和最高级
1 long ________ ________ 2 great ________ ________
3 fine ________ ________ 4 big ________ ________
5 easy ________ ________ 6 hot ________ ________
7 early ________ ________ 8 brave ________ ________
9 beautiful ________ ________ 10 important ________ ________
三、单项选择
1. ——which colour do you like _________, blue or green?
——Blue.
A.good B.better C.best D.the best
2. He doesn’t play the violin so ________as his father.
A.good B.better C.best D. best
3. Shanghai is ________ one of the two cities.
A.the larger B.larger C.the largest D.largest
1. ——Excuse me, sir. The shoes are a bit small for me.
——Don’t worry. I’ll change them for a _______ size.
A.smaller B.smallest C.larger D.largest
2. I think Bob is the most suitable person to take the job because he can do the work well with _________ money and ________ people.
A. less;less B.less;more
C.more;fewer D.less;fewer
四、用所给词的正确形式填空：
1 My brother is two years ________ (old) than me.
2 Is your friend ________ (young) than you?
3 Who is ________ (thin)，you or Helen?
4 Whose pencil-box is ________ (big)，yours or hers?
5 Which is the______( heavy) , an elephant, a horse or a pig?
6 This country is _______( rich) than that one.
7 His sister is a little _______( tall) than him.
8 Her parents have four daughters, and she is the_________( young) one
9 The ________________( expensive) bags are not always the best ones.
10 She will be much ____________( happy) in her new house.
五、选择题
1. The yellow shoes are _______ than the blue ones.
A expensive B expensiver C more D most
2. He feels _______ today than yesterday. A tired B more tired C more tireder D much tired
3. Who is_______ ,Jean,Joan,Jennet?
4. Tim is _____ than Jack.
A funny B much funny C funnier D funniest
5 I am taller than others in my class. I am _____ in my class.
A tall B taller C the taller D the tallest
6. I have ______ books than you have.
A many B much C more D most
7. His uncle ‘s house is very ________ .
A old Bolder C oldest D the oldest
8 My bike is _______ but his bike is _______
A new new B new newer C new newest D newer newest
9 Please clean your room. It’s ______now.
A clean B dirty C cleaner D cleanest
10 Our school is _______ than yours.
A the biggest B biggest C the bigger D bigger
六、完成句子
1.谁比吉姆年纪大？
Who is ________ ________ Jim?
2.谁比大卫更强壮？
Who is _____ _________ David?
3.谁的铅笔更长，他的还是她的？
Whose pencil is, his or hers?
4.这本书比那本书更有趣。
This book is ________ ________ ____________that one.
5.今天比昨天冷。
It is __________ today _________ it was yesterday.
课堂巩固
一 单选题
( ) 1. The boy ____ when he was sitting on the sofa.
A fall sleep B fell sleep C felt asleep D fell asleep
( ) 2.--Do you mind parking my car here?
--____________. See the sign? “NO PARKING!”
A. No, not at all B. No I don’t C. You’d better not D. Never mind
( ) 3. The teacher came in ______________ a book ______________ his hand.
A. have ;on B with; in C ./; in D. with;
/
( ) 4. We’ll have ________________ during Qingming Holiday.
A. a three days holiday B. a three-day holiday
C. a three-days holiday D. a three-day-holiday
( ) 5. Tom’s new book has____________ recently.
A. came out; B. been come out C. come caught D. come out
( ) 6. --- How soon will Tom _____________ there? --- In an hour.
A. reach B. get to C. arrive at D. arrive in
( ) 7. ---Can I _______________ the TV? There is an exciting basketball match now.
--- Really? Let’s watch it together.
A. turn on B. turn up C. turn down D turn off
( ) 8.--Why didn’t you come to Millie’ birthday party last night?
-- I ________________.
A. invite B. invited C. was invited D. am invited .
( ) 9. --- Can you help me type the article, John? --- Sorry, I know little about________.
A. computer programs B. word processing C. sending e-mails D. playing games
( ) 10. The witch will cut an inch of her hair, if the question ________________ incorrectly.
A. answered B answers C is answered D was answered
( ) 11.How often_____ your school sports meeting_________? ---- Twice a year.
A. is; held B. does; hold C. was ; hold D. did; hold
( ) 12. ---I _______all the levels already!
-- Really? How smart you are!
A. past B .passed C. have past D. have passed
( ) 13. The food____ well and it _____.
A is sold, sells out B is sold, is sold out C sells, sells out D sells, is sold out
( ) 14.－What’s this called in English, Eddie?
－______.
A. No, I don’t B. Yes, this is a computer. C. I’ve no idea D. I not know
( ) 15. We can change the channel on TV with a _____.
A. keyboard B. mouse C. printer D. remote control
二．完形填空。
There are all kinds of machines. They 1 in many different ways. One kind of machine is called a computer. A computer can do many things. A computer can do math problems. People can do math problems. But they cannot do it 2 a computer.
Computers remember things. Computers can’t forget 3 people tell them. People cannot remember as many things as computers. Computers help tell 4 the weather will 5 .Computers help fly rockets and spaceships.
There are 6 of ways computers are used. They are used in thousands of ways. 7 they are not always used in the same way. Some computers do just 8 things. Some computers can do a lot of things. There are 9 computers. There are big computers. There may be computers in your school. Do you 10 what they do?
( )1．A．use B．are used C．are using D．will use
( )2．A．faster than B．as fast as C．more quickly than D．so big as
( )3．A．something B．that C．everything D． things
( )4．A．which B．where C．what D．why
( )5．A．be like B．be C．look D．feel
( )6．A．all B．many C．a lot D．only some
( )7．A．But B．And C．When D．Though
( )8．A．a little B．little C．few D．a few
( )9．A．large B．huge（巨大的） C．good D．small
( )10．A．get B．talk C．make D．know
三．阅读理解
A
Airline
Flight number
Destination
Departure time
Gate
Air Canada
137
Beijing
10.12a.m.
24
Japan Airlines
320
Tokyo
10.30a.m.
18
British Airways
405
Paris
11.00a.m.
20
Pan American
226
London
11.20a.m.
12
Pan American
12
Beijing
11.43a.m.
15
Air Canada
178
Tokyo
12.32p.m.
21
CAAC
289
Hong Kong
12.32p.m.
14
( ) 1. If you want to fly to Paris, you should take________.
A. Flight 137 B. Flight 320 C. Flight 226 D. Flight 405
( ) 2. Flight 289 to Hong Kong leaves at_______.
A. 11.43a.m. B. 10.12a.m. C. 12.32p.m. D. 10.12a.m.
( ) 3. A lady wants to take Flight 12 to Beijing, she should go to Gate________.
A. 14 B. 15 C. 12 D. 18
( ) 4. Flight 226 to London is from _________.
A. Pan American B. Japan Airlines C. Air Canada D. CAAC
( ) 5. A man is at Gate 18. He’s going to________.
A. Tokyo B. Hong Kong C. London D. Paris
第七讲
Unit4
◆知识探究
Step one Getting ready
1.Listen to advertisements for four funny inventions.
advertisement 可数名词“广告”
an advertisement advertisements 缩写为 ads
eg. They will put an advertisement in the newspaper.
There are too many advertisement on the TV.
advertising 不可数名词 “广告，广告业”，是广告的总称。
eg. Advertising is everywhere.
advertise 动词，“做广告，登广告”可做及物或不及物动词。
eg. They advertised the new car.
He advertised for a new job.
funny形容词“有趣的”，在句中作定语或表语。
fun 名词 “乐趣”
eg. He told me a funny story.
I think the film is very funny.
We had a lot of fun at the party.
拓展：funny money 伪钞 funny paper 连环漫画栏
funny car 腊肠型赛车 funny farm 精神病院 funny book 连环画刊
2.Write a short article about a new invention that you will create.
create 及物动词“创造，创作” 指经过努力让事物从无到有或从粗糙到完美，对象可以是具体的或者抽象的。
eg. He created many famous plays.
He created the wonder.
拓展：create 作可数名词“创造物，作品”
作不可数名词 “创造，创建”
creator可数名词 “创作者”
creative 形容词 “有创造力的”
eg. The creator created the creation. He is creative.
辨析：create 与make
create 创造出原来不存在的东西 make 通过工作制造出某种东西
eg. Who created the world.
He made the watch.
【随堂练】：
一、用所给词的适当形式填空。
He is an (invent),he (invent)lots of (invent).
2. She was (born) in China.
3. She (realize) she was wrong yesterday.
4. The (price) is so high,it is so .
5. Surfing the internet is p among teenages.
6. The idea is p ,we will take this diea.
7. This toy is s ,and I have never seen it before.
8. She created many famous works,and she was .(create)
二、完成句子
1. 自那以后,我就已经学会照顾自己.
, I have learnt to take care of myself.
2. 我们已经三年没有联系了.
We each other for three years.
3.请远离毒品,学会保护自己.
Please drugs, and learn to protect yourself.
4.我们很相爱,同时,我们互相照顾对方.
We love each other, we take good care of each other.
5.勤劳在白天,作息在晚上.
Work ,and rest at night.
Step two Reading& listening
3 telephone
可数名词 “电话，电话机”缩写形式phone
eg. I don’t have a telephone.
Tony often talks with me on the telephone.
动词 “打电话”
eg. I telephone my grandma every week.
拓展：“给某人打电话”表达
telephone/phone sb
call sb (up)
give sb a call
make a telephone call to sb
eg. I often telephone/phone my parents on weekends.
Please call me (up) this evening.
Please give me a call when you get home.
My best friend often makes a telephone call to me.
4.They help people live a better life.
live 及物动词 “过…的生活” live a …life
eg. live a good/rich/poor life.
5.After its invention, traveling became faster and more comfortable.
comfortable 形容词 “舒适的，舒服的” 反义词 uncomfortable
comfort 名词和动词 “舒适，安慰”
comfortably 副词
eg. I like comfortable life.
I feel uncomfortable now. I want to go home.
The new car becomes more comfortable.
中考链接：
What he said made everyone feel .
A. comfort B. comfortable C. comforting D. comfortably
6.In the early 19th century…
century 可数名词 “世纪，百年” 一世纪指一百年，不指具体时间，只指时间段
eg. He was born in the 20th century.
Two centuries later, people still remember him.
拓展：twentieth-century “20世纪的”
是一个序数词+名词构成的形容词，作定语。
“在第几世纪”必须用序数词，而且应在序数词前加定冠词the
eg. It was a twentieth-century invention.
in the 21st century
in the mid-19th century/in the middle of the 19th century
7.Alexander Graham Bell invented one of the first practical telephones in 1876.
invent 及物动词 “发明”
eg. Do you know who invented computer?
He invented a green car.
辨析 invent 与 discover
invent “发明”指客观上没有，发明以前未曾有过的东西，如新工具，新方法
discover “发现” 指发现客观上已经存在，但不为人知的事物
eg. Gilbert discovered electricity, but Edison invented the electric light bulb.
8.Since then, people have been able to speak to each other over long distances.
distance 可用作可数名词和不可数名词 “距离”
eg. Keep a safe distance between cars.
What is the distance from here to your school?
拓展： 与distance 相关的表达
at a distance 隔一段距离 in the distance 在远处
from a distance 从远处 out of distance（from）离…太远，达不到
9.They allow people to keep in touch with each other anytime, anywhere.
allow及物动词， “允许”allow sb to do sth “允许某人做某事” 动词不定式作宾语补足语。
eg. My parents don’t allow me to go out at night.
Do you allow us to watch TV?
拓展：allow doing sth 允许做某事
be allowed to do sth 被允许做某事
eg. He doesn’t allow smoking here.
Passages are not allowed to smoke.
中考链接：
Take time to relax by listening to music, reading a book or just spending some time alone. Relaxing allows you to your studies with more energy.
A. return B. to return C.returning
keep in touch (with sb) “与…保持联系” = stay in touch (with sb)
eg. We should keep in touch with each other.
We’ll always keep/stay in touch.
10.Thomas Edison developed the first practical light bulb in 1879.
develop 及物动词 “开发，研制”
eg. We need to develop solar energy.
They are developing a new car.
拓展：develop 还可用作不及物动词， “发展”
developed 形容词 “发达的”developing 形容词 “发展中的”
development 名词“发展，开发”
eg. Everything develops.
The US is a developed country, India and China are developing countries.
中考链接：
It’s helpful to a good habit of reading in language learning.
A.take B.show C. develop D.math
11.With light bulb, people can do as many things in the evenings as they can in the daytime.
daytime 不可数名词，意为“白天，日间” in the daytime 在白天
Tigers and foxes often sleep in the daytime.
He works in the daytime and helps me with my housework in the evening.
12.the new cars made loud noises and frightened them.
make noises “发出噪音，弄出声音” make （a）noise
Don’t make noises. Your father is sleeping.
辨析 noise, voice 与sound
noise
噪音，喧闹声
指吵闹、喧哗声，往往是不和谐、不悦耳的声音
voice
噪音
尤指人或动物特有的声音，如说话声、歌声、笑声等
sound
声音
泛指自然界中的一切声音
He always makes loud noises.
She often talks in a low voice.
Light travels faster than sound.
中考链接：
Stop making so much . The children are sleeping.
A. voice B. noise C.sound
13.I suppose that people could only drive in the(4)daytime because those cars didn’t have lights.
suppose及物动词 “认为，猜想，想象” 后接从句作宾语，常和“suppose+sb+（+to be）+形容词/名词”结构作同义句转换。suppose，think，believe等后跟宾语从句时，主句的主语是第一人称时，若变为否定句，必须否定前移，即把否定句转移到主句上来。
Do you suppose… Yes, I suppose so / No, I suppose not 或 No, I don’t suppose so.
eg. I don’t suppose he is thirty.
- Do you suppose it is going to rain?
-Yes, I suppose so / No, I suppose not 或 No, I don’t suppose so.
拓展：
be supposed to do “被要求做某事，应该做某事，被期望做某事”
相当于 should do sth
eg. Teachers are supposed to know a lot.
中考链接：
You are to type quickly when talking to each other on QQ so the other person doesn’t get bored.
A. suggested B. supposed C. taught D. supported
【随堂练】：
一、完成句子
1. 她住在乡村,我住在城市.
She lived ,and I lived in city.
2.我们一起走一下吧.
Let,s .
3.很久以前,这里住着公主和王子.
,princess and prince lived here.
4.不好意思,我没意识到我错了.
Sorry, I I was wrong.
5.我已经三年没有跟她联系了.
I haven,t already her.
二、用good,bad,as...as...填空。
1.Who got a （good） mark in PE,Mark or Mary?
2.Who got a （bad）mark in PE,Mark or Mary?
Mark got a better mark in PE.
3. Whose home is （far）from school,Mark,s or Mary,s?
4. Who got a （good）mark in PE in your class?
5. Who got a （bad）mark in PE,in your class.
6. Whose home is （far）from school,Mark,s,Lintao,s or Mary,s?
7. Her computer was as （good）as mine.
8. The machine can produce as (much) production as hers
9. The computer was (good) than that one.
Step three-Listening 讲解
1.keep the dust off your shoes
keep…off “使…不接近（或不接触，远离）”
eg. Keep it off the shoes.
She wears sunglasses to keep the sun off.
dust 不可数名词，“灰尘，尘土”
throw dust in one’s eyes
dustbin duststorm
2. can look behind and in front of you at the same time.
at the same time “同时” 其中same为形容词，在使用前一定要加定冠词the。
eg. They arrived at school at the same time yesterday morning.
You must hand in your papers at the same time.
【随堂练】：
一、完成句子
1． 木马太重了，他们不能随身带走。
The wooden hourse was ___________heavy ___________them ___________ ___________with them.
1. 他终于成功地写完了这本书。
At last he ___________ ___________ ___________this book.
2. 最后制造皇冠的人被送进监狱。
In the end the crown-maker ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________.
3. 他自从来到这间学校，认识了许多朋友。
he ___________ ___________many friends since he ___________to this school.
4. 今晚我不去看电影，因为我看过了。
I won’t go to the cinema, because I ___________ ___________it.
5.好久不见，你到哪里去了？
I ___________ ___________you for a long time. Where ___________you ___________?
Step four-Speaking ＆ Writing
1. We make our voice rise at the end.
辨析rise 与 raise
rise
不及物动词
指自然地上升；表示（太阳、价格等）上升、 （河水）上涨、起立、起床
raise
及物动词
指人为地增加、上涨、升上去等 ；表示举手、升国旗、饲养抚育等意思
eg. The moon above the mountains.
Before you answer the question, you should your hand.
2. What do you use it for?
辨析what for 与why
what...for
侧重于问目的，一般不用because回答
——What do you want a basket for?
——I want to buy some apples.
why
侧重于询问原因，一般要用because回答
——Why were you late for school?
——Because I missed the early bus.
3. What is special about it?
special 形容词，“特别的，特殊的”
辨析 special 与specially
special
形容词
表示“特殊的，特别的”反义词是ordinary，强调事物特有的性质或专门的目的、用途
There is something special you can do in the park.
specially
副词
表示“特别的，尤其”
I came here specially to see you.
中考链接：
——What was Jim wearing in the party?
——Nothing .He was in his usual shirt and jeans.
A. special B. simple C. important D. interesting
4. If you shout “fly”, the car will turn into a plane in 30second.
turn into “变成，成为”
eg. The sofa turns into a bed.
The robot turns into a huge spider soon.
拓展：turn away 把…打发走 turn on 打开
turn off 关上 turn up 调大
turn down 调小 turn over 翻身
【随堂练】
一、单项选择
1. We _______ be rude to our parents.
A.ought B.ought to C.ought not D.ought not to
2. I would like ______ an English song for you.
A.sing B.to sing C.singing D.to singing
3.—Remember______him about it when he comes back. —Sure, I will. A.tell B.to tell C.telling D.to telling
4.Jill denied______ the vase but she admitted _____ the vase.
A.to steal, seeing B.stealing, to see C.to steal, to see D.stealing, seeing
5.Liu Mei is even ______ at singing than dancing.
A.good B.better C.best D.the best
6.Guangzhou is one of ______ in the world.
A.the biggest city B.strongest cities C.richest cities D.the most crowded cities
7. I have taught English in this school _____ 1980. It was thirty years ago.
A.after B.in C.since D.for
8. –When _____Mr.Green _____ to Australia?
--He ______ there for a month. He will be back tomorrow.
A.has…gone; has gone B.has…been; has been C.did…go; has been D.did…go; has gone
9.______ poor child the boy is!
A.How B.What a C.What D.How a
10.______ nice weather it is!
A.How B.What a C.What D.How a
11. LiuMing studies very ______, and he ______ watches TV at home.
A.hard; hardly B.hardly; hard C.hard; hard D.hardly; hardly
12.Daniel is a _______ cook. He can cook very ______.
A.well; good B.good; well C.good; good D.well; well
13. In my home, meals _____ often ______ by my mother.
A.is; cook B.are; cook C.is; cooked D.are; cooked
14.The girl _______ lots of questions by the policeman yesterday.
A.will ask B.is asked C.asked D.was asked
15.Lights must _______ before you leave the room.
A.be turn off B.turned off C.be turned off D.be turned
二、书面表达
请以The Life in the Future为题写一篇记叙文，按下列提示完成。
1. 可以想象一下：未来的生活将会是什么样子的呢？
2. 具体介绍一下未来的生活，很多事情都由计算机或机器人来完成。例如：料理家务、购物、网上聊天、不出门就可以看医生、打扫卫生、做饭等。
3. 为了未来的生活，现在我们应该努力学习，实现理想。
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
One possible version
The Life in the Future
What do you think the life in the future will be like?
In the future there will be computers in our homes. Computers will help us to know a lot over the world. We will be able to talk by e-mail. Scientists will make many robots. Robots can help us to do some cleaning, do some cooking or do some washing. We can do some shopping and see a doctor without going out of our homes. The life in the future will be good. For this, we will study hard. I believe we’ll be able to do this
Step five-More Practice 讲解
1 it sometimes made a mess on the paper.
辨析 sometimes, some times, sometime, some time
sometimes
频度副词
有时
表示动作发生的不经常性，多与一般现在时连用，它可位于句首句中或句末。对它提问常用 how often
some times
名词短语
几次；几倍
time 是不可数名词，对它提问常用how many times
sometime
副词
某时
表示某个不确切的时间，常与将来时或过去时连用。对它提问常用when
some time
名词短语
一段时间
句中谓语动词常为延续性动词。对它提问用 how long
口诀：分开为“一段”（some time），相连是“某时”（sometime）。
分开s 是“倍，次”（some times），相连s是“有时”（sometimes）
eg. Sometimes she has lunch at school.
I’ve been to the museum some times.
I’ll visit Daming sometime this summer vacation.
She has lived here for some time.
2. Zhuge Liang used such lanterns to give signals in battles.
辨析 such 与so
such
形容词，修饰名词
such+a/an+形容词+可数名词单数
such+形容词+不可数名词
such+形容词+复数名词
so
副词，修饰形容词或副词
so+形容词/副词
so+形容词+a/an+可数名词单数
so+many/few/much/little+可数名词复数/不可数名词
拓展：1.such与so接单数可数名词时，意思相同
such+a/an+形容词+单数可数名词=so+形容词+a/an+可数名词单数
She is =she is 她是一个如此好的女孩。
2.名词被many, much, few, little 修饰时，需用so
There are many visitors in our school today.
口诀： 名前such,形副so, 多多少少也用so
little属特殊，“小”用such“少”用so
中考链接：
——Why do you speak in a loud voice?
——Because I want to make myself clearly.
A. such; hear B. so ; heard C. such ; heard D. so ; hear
3. The kongming Lantern led to the invention of the hot-air ballon.
lead to 意为“导致，引起，通向” 后跟名词或代词，过去式为led。
All roads lead to Rome.
Eating too much junk food can lead to some health problems.
拓展： lead sb to do sth “带领某人做某事”
eg. He led us to finish the work
lead a …life “过…生活”
eg. Every day I lead a busy life.
第八讲
单元语法——形容词与副词同级比较
1. 两者相比（甲=乙）用“as +形容词/副词原级+ as”表示。如：
My English is as good as my brother’s.我的英语和我弟弟一样好。
Dick can type as fast as his uncle.迪克打字和他叔叔一样快。
2. 两者相比（甲≠乙）用“as / so +形容词/副词原级+ as”表示。如：
Mary is not as / so tall as her sister.玛丽不比她姐姐高。
The girl in red didn’t make the model plane as / so well as you.
穿红衣服的那个女孩没有你做的模型飞机好。
3. 成倍优势的比较问题。
（1）“倍数+ as … as”。如：
Our school is three times as large as theirs.我们学校是他们学校面积的3倍。
This lift runs twice as fast as that one.这个电梯是那个电梯速度的2倍。
（2）“倍数+ the size / length / width / height / depth … of”。如：
Our school is three times the size of theirs.我们学校的面积是他们学校的3倍。
The new road is four times the width of the old one.
这条新路的宽度为那条老路的4倍。
以上结构可以转化为“净倍数+比较级+ than”，表达同样的意思。试比较：
Our school is two times larger than theirs.我们学校比他们学校大2倍。
The new road is three times wider than the old one.这条新路比那条老路宽3倍。
因此，在这种情况下使用比较时，要特别注意倍数的数量问题，要特别注意倍数的数量问题，要剔除基准数。换言之，在“倍数+ as … as”中的倍数为n，在“净倍数+比较级+ than”中，净倍数应为n-1。
4. 名词置于as … as之间的特点。在该结构中，所用的名词一般是可数名词，且常需不定冠词分隔形容词和名词。如：
as good a teacher as my father 父亲般的好老师
as experienced an engineer as Dick’s brother 像迪克弟弟一样有经验的工程师
5. as … as结构引导从句，所接代词格的选择。在口语中，一般常用宾语。如：
You can’t expect to type as fast as me (= as I do).你不能指望和我打字一样快。
She is not as clever as Dick (= as he is).她不像迪克那样聪明。
在容易引起歧义的情况下，需合理选用所属格。试比较：
You hate him as much as me ( = you hate me).你讨厌他就像讨厌我一样。
You hate him as much as I (= I hate him).你像我一样讨厌他。
由此可见，不同属格，意义迥异。
注意：
1．在表示“和……一样……”时可用“as……as”结构(前面的as后要用原级)：
He is as busy as ever．
他还是和以前一样忙。
We’11 give you as much help as we
can．
我们将尽量帮助你。
His hands are as cold as ice．
他的手冰冷。
The airport was as crowded as ever．
机场还像平常那样拥挤。
2．在表示“不像……那样……”时可用“not as(so)……as”：
It is not as cold as in Geneva．
这里不像日内瓦那样冷。
Jack isn’t as(so)old as he looks．
杰克不像他看起米那么老。
I in not so(as) experienced as you think．
我不像你想的那样有经验。
She is not so talkative as before．
她不像以前那样爱说话了。
3．这种结构中也可包含一个状语：
The whale was twice as long as her boat．
那条鲸鱼有她的船两倍长。
My command of English is not half so good as yours．
我英文掌握得还不及你一半好。
Their horse is about three times as big as ours．
他们的房子有我们房子三倍大。
We’ve produced ten times as much cotton this year as we did twenty years ago．
我们今年生产的棉花是20年前的十倍。
4．在这类结构前还可以加almost，just，nearly或quite这些副词：
He was almost as diligent as his sister．
他几乎像他姐姐一样勤奋。
Mary was just as busy as before．
玛丽还是像以前那样忙。
She was nearly as tall as her
mother．
她几乎像她妈一般高了。
The hotel was not quite as good as they had expected．
那家旅馆完全不像他们预料的那样好。
5．as……as还可用在许多固定说法中：
as brave as a lion as bright as day
as busy as a bee as cheerful as a lark．
as clear as crystal as cunning as a fox
as fat as a pig as gentle as a lamb
as vain as a peacock as tough as leather
as black as pitch as soft as velvet
as stubborn as a mule as easy as ABC
as sharp as a needle as strong as a horse
【随堂练】
一、写出下列单词的比较级
1.good__________ 2.healthy ___________ 3.nice_________ 4.old___________ 5.fat____________ 6.small ____________ 7.pretty ________ 8.new__________ 9.tasty__________ 10.large____________ 11.funny________ 12.red__________ 13.fit___________ 14.lucky___________ 15.interesting_______________________-
二、改写句子:（合成一句）
1.You are happy. Mary is happy, too.
Mary is _____ ______ _______ you.
2.Peter is 1.7metres tall. Ben is 1.7metres tall, too.
Ben _____ _______ _____ as Peter.
3.Linda is 15 years old. Kitty is 15 years old, too.
Kitty is _____ ______ _____ Linda.
4.My diet is healthy. Your diet is healthy, too.
Your diet is ______ _______ as _______.
5. Simon is fast. John is very fast.
John is ________ ________ Simon.
Simon is ________ _________ John.
Simon isn’t ________ ________ _______ John.
Simon is ______ _______ than John.
三、二选一:
8. We do the homework as __________ as they (quickly/ quick)
9. Can you speak English as __________ as your classmate? (good/ well)
10.Your idea sounds as _________ as his idea.(great/greatly)
11.Davis is as __________ as Steven in class. (careful/ carefully)
12. Pleas talk as ___________ as you can . (loud/loudly)
13. This flower smells as ________ as that one. (nice/ nicely)
课堂巩固
一、选择题
1. Students should learn how __________ problems.
A. solve B. solving C. can solve D. to solve
2. I heard that they made the murderer ____ to jail themselves.
A. to go, instead B. go, instead of C. go , instead D. to go, instead of
3. Digital cameras are becoming very popular , though some still too much.
A pay B spend C sell D cost
4. Don’t make this or that. I’m too busy!
A to do B do C doing D done
5. ---Can you find the answer ______ the question? ---Yes, it’s too easy.
A. to B. for C. with D. of
6. Many people are unaware _______ the danger of polluting our environment.
A. about B. of C. with D. to
1. Beijing may be _______ city in China.
A. the famous B. famous C. the most famous D. more famous
2. ----What is the __________ of the camera? ----3, 000 yuan.
A. money B. quantity C. number D. price
3. Sometimes, you might much hidden danger inside our houses.
A. be unaware of B. be dependent on C. be strict with D. be aware of
4. ----We find it hard to deal with so many in the corners of the house.
----Really? But a ___ on the computer is very useful.
A mice, mice B mousse, mouse C mice, mouse D mouse, mouse
5. —We can’t live for a long time water. —I think so.
A with B without C for D by
6. How long does it you to get to school?
A spend B take C cost D use
7. A lot of story books are on sale, but good ones.
A any B some C few D none
8. What a beautiful sweater！How much did you for it?
A spend B pay C cost D take
9. The exam is coming. She asked the teacher ______ some advice.
A to B for C of D at
10. It’s our duty to keep us .
A health B healthy C healthily D healthyly
11. The boy doesn't speak _______ his sister, but his written work is very good.
A. as well as B. so good as C. more better than D. more worse than
12. It is generous of you to lend me a large __________of money.
A. amount B. number C . lot D. much
13. How much______ it cost to build the theatre? -- Forty _____ yuan.
A. does, million B. is, millions C. does, millions of D. is, million of
1. He ___goes to see his grandparents and stays with them for________.
A. sometime, some time B. some times, sometime
C. sometimes, sometime D. sometimes, some time
二、用单词的正确形式填空
1. All the great ____________ are respected（尊敬）by the world. (invent)
2. The ____________ lesson is very difficult but very important. You must learn it by heart.(twelve)
3. What we have had is just part of the truth. We should try to get ____________ information about it. (far)
4. The Yangtze River is the ___________ longest river in the world. (three)
5. It’s very important for us to learn English ____________. (good)
6. This cartoon film is ____________ than the one I saw last Saturday. (fun)
7. People from Italy are called ___________. (Italy)
8. Carl looks much _____________ than before. (health)
第九讲
Unit5
◆知识探究
Step one Reading & Listening讲解
1.I was very nervous at first.says Sarah. 萨拉说 我起初很紧张。
at first“起初；起先”，它主要用于强调前后对照，暗示接下来的动作与前面的动作不同，甚至相反。反义短语：at last最终。如：
At first he didn’t agree, but at last he had to.起初他不同意，但最终只好同意了。
( )______,the Internet was only used by the government. But now it’s widely used in every field.
A. As usually B. At first C. After all D. So far
2. However ,my host family are friendly .但是，我的寄宿家庭非常友好。
friendly 比较级friendlier/more friendly ，最高级friendliest / most friendly.
常构成短语be friendly to sb. 对某人友好； be friendly with sb. 与某人友好相处。
①他们班里的每个人对我都很友好。
Everyone in their class _____ _________ _____ me.
②我们很快就与邻居们友好相处了。
We soon became ________ _______ the neighbors.
3. I’ve learnt to use chopsticks , and they’re teaching me a little Chinese!
我学会使用筷子了，并且他们正在教我一些汉语。
a little 意思是“一点点，稍许”用来修饰不可数名词，表示数量，也可以修饰形容词和副词的原级或比较级，表示程度。
①杯子里有点水。
There is _____ ________ water in the glass.
②长途跋涉以后，我有点累了。
After a long walk， I felt _____ ________ tired.
辨析： a little , little , a few , few
a little
修饰不可数名词
表示肯定，意为“不多的”
little
表示否定，意为“几乎没有”
a few
修饰复数可数名词
表肯定，意为“几个，一些”
few
表否定，“不多的，少数的”
随堂练习：用a little , little , a few , few填空。
①一点牛奶就够了。
_____________ milk is enough.
②快点！没剩多少时间了。
Hurry up! There is __________ time left.
③妈妈给我买了些苹果。
My mother bought me _____________ apples.
④他初来乍到，因此没有几个朋友。
He is new here , so he has ___________ friends.
4. It’s been a fantastic experience so far , says Eric.
到目前为止，它是一次很棒的经历。埃里克说。
experience 此处作可数名词，意识是 “经历”，而这个单词在作 “经验”的意思时，为不可数名词。
so far ,意思是“到目前为止”，多用于现在完成时。
①做一名志愿者对我来说是一次有趣的经历。
It was _______ ____________ for me to be a volunteer.
②这个老师有很多处理青少年问题的经验。
The teacher has a lot _____________ dealing with the teens’ problems.
③我已经见过很多动物了,到目前为止.
I have seen lots of animals .
④我已经看了三本书到目前为止.
I three books .
5. I’ve learnt a bit of tai chi , and I really enjoy it. 我学了一点太极拳，并且我十分喜欢它。
a bit of 一点，小量 用于修饰不可数名词。例如：
a bit of water a bit of milk a bit of money
辨析：a bit of , a bit , a little
a bit of
一点
修饰不可数名词
a bit
稍微，有点
修饰形容词、副词的原级、比较级
a little
不多的
既可以修饰不可数名词，也可以修饰形容词、副词的原级、比较级
①瓶子里有点水。
There is _______________ water in the bottle.
②请打开窗，天气有点热。
Please open the window , it’s ________________ hot.
6.The teachers have introduced us to Chinese painting as well.
老师也使我们初次了解中国画。
introduce sb. to sth.使某人初次了解…；使尝试。如：
Jack introduces me to the new type of mobile phone.
杰克让我了解了这款新型手机。
I’d like to introduce you to the French food in that restaurant.
我想让你们尝尝那家餐馆的法国菜。
introduce sb. to sb.介绍某人给某人认识。如：
Let me introduce my cousin Sarah to you.我来介绍我的表妹萨拉给你认识。
I was introduces to Mr. Smith.我被引见给史密斯先生。
7. We’ve also tried to paint some pictures ourselves! 我们自己也试着画了一些中国画。
try to do sth. 尽力做某事， 其否定形式为try not to do sth. 尽力不要做某事
辨析：try to do sth. 与try doing sth.
try to do sth.
尽力去做某事，不包含是否成功之意。
try doing sth.
（用某一办法）试着去做某事。
①我尽力把英语学好。
I ______ ____ ______ English well.
②他试着把这个难题算出来。
He _______ ________ out the math problem.
8. I haven’t had much success yet. but I’ll keep trying.
(1) success名词，“成功，胜利“
【拓展】successful形容词，成功的 successfully 副词，成功地
succeed动词，成功 succeed in doing sth. 成功地做某事
Don’t give up. You know hard work leads to _______________（成功）.
(2) yet副词，“还，已经”，多用于现在完成时态的一般疑问句和否定句末尾，并可与not连用构成省略回答。
I haven’t heard from her yet. 我还没有收到她的信。
-- Have you finished your homework? 你完成你的家庭作业了吗？
-- Not yet. 还没有。
（3） keep doing sth. 继续做某事 相当于keep on doing sth.
【拓展】keep sb. doing sth. 使某人一直做某事
It’t not polite to keep guests waiting for you.
9. I plan to keep in touch with them when I return home.
plan此处用作动词 ，意为“计划” plan to do sth. 计划做某事
plan还可作可数名词，意为“计划” make a plan / plans 制订计划
10. We’ll see on another soon because they’ll come over to the UK for the second part of the exchange next month.
one another 相互，相当于each other
【拓展】（1）another作代词，“（三者或以上）另一（事物或人）”，表泛指。
I have eaten some apples. Could you please give me another?
(2) another作形容词，“又一的，再一的”，指三者或以上的人或物中除去已知部分，剩余部分中的某一个，不表特指，another one与one more 同义
I don’t like this sweater, please show me another one / one more.
(3) 作形容词时，another既可修饰人也可修饰物，其后接单数名词或代词。 another 还可与基数词和复数名词连用，其结构another+数词(大于1)+复数名词= 数词（大于1）+ more+复数名词
I’d like another two hamburgers. = I’d like two more hamburgers.
11. I can’t wait.
can’t wait 迫不及待，其后接动词不定式 can’t wait to do sth. 迫不及待地做某事
Can’t help doing sth. 情不自禁地做某事，忍不住做某事
I can’t help crying when I hear that my mother is ill.
12. A person who is invited to stay at another person’s home is a guest.
invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某事
invite sb. to + 地点名词/活动 邀请某人去某地/ 参加活动
They invited Jack to join their club.
I invited my teacher to my home yesterday.
She invited me to her birthday party.
【拓展】invitation可数名词，“邀请，请帖”
13. Tomorrow I’m going to take part in an exchange programme in London.
明天我将参加一个在伦敦的交流计划。
take part in 参加，多指参加一些集会性活动，如会议、劳动等。
辨析：take part in ,join , join in
take part in
多指参加群众性活动，具有暂时性特点。
join
指加入某党派、组织、军队或社会团体，并成为其中一员，其后也可以接人，意为“和某人一起做某事”
join in
指参加小规模的活动，如球赛，游戏，多用于日常口语。Join in doing sth 参加做某事。
用take part in ,join , join in填空。
①你愿意参加我们的晚会吗？
Would you like to ______________________________ our party?
②请加入我们吧。
Please ___________________________ us.
③我可以参加这个游戏吗？
May I _______________________ playing the game?
14. It tasted fantastic.
taste 此处用作连系动词，“尝起来，有....味道”，其后接形容词作表语，构成系表结构
The wine tastes sweet.
【拓展】taste 可用作可数名词，“味道，滋味”
I don’t like the taste of orange. 我不喜欢橘子的味道。
15. His parents are proud of his success.
be proud of 以......而骄傲，相当于take pride in
I am proud of our country.
16.Listen to the conversation between Mr. Liu and the students.
听刘老师和学生之间的对话。
between …… and…… 在……和……之间
辨析：between , among
between
用于指两者之间
among
用于指三者或三者以上之间
①银行和学校之间有家医院。
There is a hospital _________ the bank ______ the school.
②这两本书之间有什么区别？
What is the difference _________ the two books?
③高老师正坐在孩子们之间。
Miss Gao is sitting __________ the children.
④这位歌手在年轻人中很受欢迎。
The singer is popular ______ the young people.
17. Arrive at the airport on time , please. 请按时到机场。
on time 按时，准时
辨析： on time ,in time
on time
按时，准时
in time
及时，常含有匆忙之意。
火车会按时到达吗？
Will the train arrive ____________?
警察及时赶到了那里。
The police got there ________________.
【随堂练】
一、根据句意及首字母提示完成句子
1. I remember Mr Green gave us an e __________ class. I will never forget it.
2.Does your family e __________ gifts at Christmas?
3.Different countries have different customs and c__________ .
4.Wang Ning and Li Xiuping are h __________ of CCTV.
5.He started playing for the l __________ club when he was 10 years old.
6.More than 33 million passengers travel on B__________ Airways planes every year.
7.She said she was g __________ to have the chance to come here and she enjoyed herself.
8.The g__________ from China were highly praised.
9.Chinese use c__________ to have meals.(饭)
10.He is making a t __________ of the world.
二.完成句子
1.许多人学英语，以便他们能再商业领域获得更多的成功。
Many people learn English so that they can ______ ________ ________ ________business.
2.当地政府应该帮助这个可怜的孩子上学。
________ ________ ________ should help the poor kid go to school.
3.昨天我向全班同学作了自我介绍
I __________myself ________ the class yesterday.
4.我将很乐意帮助你。
I’d________ ________ _______ help you.
5.我们请三位客人来家里吃饭。
We have ________ _________ to dinner.
三、单项选择
( )1. weekdays, what time do you get up?
A.On B.For C.By D.In
( )2.Can you me your friend?
A.introduce; to B.introduce; for C.show; to D.show; for
( )3.The baby was tired after crying for a while.
A.a bit of B.a little C.a lot of D.a few
( )4.I’m glad you.
A.to see B.see C.saw D.seeing
( )5. Alice writing five perfect reports so far.
A.completes B.completed C.was completing D.has completed
( )6.There is only water in the bottle.
A.bit B.a bit of C.few D.a few of
( )7.Mr Brown will introduce us western art next week.
A. to B.from C.on D. in
( )8.He was angry , but after he read the letter, he laughed.
A.first B.the first C.at first D.at the first.
( )9.They around Shanghai next week.
A.tour B.will tour C.toured D.has toured
Step Two Speaking ＆ Writing
1. You should be polite and respect local culture.
polite形容词，意为“有礼貌的”，其反义词为impolite或rude,副词形式为politely。常用短语：be polite to sb, 意为“对某人有礼貌”。
We should be polite to the old people.
中考链接：
Tom thinks people will help him if he asks for help______(polite).
2. Arrive at the airport on time, please.
On time意为“按时，准时”。
Will the train arrive on time?
In time意为“及时”，常含有“匆忙”之意。
3. Don’t worry about the exchange visit.
Worry about 为固定短语，意为“担心”，与be worried about同义。
You have nothing to worry about.
中考链接：
The tour guide has made the route for the school trip. We don’t need to ________ that.
A. be worried about B.be afraid of C.be sorry for
4.写作
假如你是来自英国的交换生Sarah， 你在北京已经待了一个星期。现在你想用报告的形式向你的英语同学介绍你的交流生活。请根据以下提示词语完成报告，报告开头已经出，不计入总词数。
要求（1）简要说明你的交流生活和感受 （2）语言准确，表达清楚，词数不少于70.
提示词：go well, enjoy, fantastic, spend, visit, Chinese culture, delicious, friendly, make friends with, keep in touch with, hope
A report on my exchange visit to Beijing
My exchange visit to Beijing
_____________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
范文： My exchange visit to Beijing has gone well, I have been in the city for a week, I enjoy everything here. It’s really fantastic. I spend the weekdays studying with Chinese students. At the weekend. I tour around the city with my classmates. I have visited many places of interest. I have learned a lot about Chinese culture. I have tried many local food. It's delicious! The people in Beijing are friendly. I have made many new friends. When I return home, I will keep in touch with them. I hope my Chinese friends can come over to my country.
【随堂练】
一、选择合适的单词或短语完成下列各句
1. I you to provide me with toys.(hope, wish)
2.Shandong Province is in the of China.(east, eastern)
3.We can get much on the Internet.(information, messages)
4.We’ll from home for a week.(leave, be away)
5.Watching television can be very (education, educational).
二、根据句意及括号内的提示完成句子
1.Alice in Wonderful is a (极好的) movie.
2.I have no (经验) in selling products.
3.Could you (介绍)yourself to the class?
4.Many people learn English so that they can have more (成功) in business.
5.How many (文化)does China have？
6.The (主人) of the house is an old woman.
7.The (游客) are having a good time in China.
8.Could you tell us about your (经历) in Africa.
三.句型转换
1. Mine is different from yours.(改为同义句)
Mine isn’t the ________ ________ yours.
2.To have guests will be exciting.(改为同义句)
________ ________ ________ exciting to have guests.
3.I’ve already bought some apples.(改为一般疑问句)
________ you bought any apples ________?
4.The Blacks have lived in China since three years ago.(对划线部分提问)
_________ _________ have the Blacks lived in China?
5.It was his big success.(改为同义句)
He was very_____________.
四、完形填空
It was the last day of school and I planned to travel to my friend’s hometown. I hadn’t seen him for years and this was a good 1 to meet him again.
I was busy at school so it was rather 2 when I came back home. It was already 10 o’clock at night. Time was running out. After a hurried meal I left. 3 I found a taxi very soon. Asking the driver to drive me fast to the station, I relaxed for a while, imagining what my friend looked like now. I was soon at the station and was sure that I would be able to 4 the train. Unfortunately, I fell on the way and lost some time. To my complete 5 , when I reached the platform, I saw that the train had just left! It was the last train so I had to 6 home.
My mother was glad to see me back as she had a feeling and went to bed but I had a 7 sleep. The next morning I was very tired. As I was having breakfast the 8 arrived. I read over the pages
and was shocked to 9 that the train I missed had had an accident. How 10 I was that I missed the train!
（ ）1. A.sign B.chance C.sense D.dream
（ ） 2.A.strange B.cold C.late D.quiet
（ ）3.A.Finally B.Suddenly C.Strangely D.Luckily
（ ）4.A.stop B.see C.catch D.miss
（ ） 5.A.satisfaction B.hope C.surprise D.joy
（ ）6.A.call B.leave C.reach D.miss
（ ）7.A.deep B.bad C.great D.heavy
（ ）8.A.newspaper B.ticket C.mild D.train
（ ）9.A.find B.hear C.feel D.remember
（ ）10.A.hopeful B.thankful C.careful D.painful
Step three-More Practice 讲解
1 You can experience a different culture and learn a new language.你可以体验不同的文
化，学习一门新的语言．
Experience在此作动词，意思是“体验；感受”。如：
Children need to experience things for themselves to learn from them.
儿童需要自己体验事物以从中学习。
experience也可作名词，表示（一次）经历；体验”。如：
It was a fantastic experience for me to stay in Guangzhou for three months.
在广州逗留三个月对我是一种很美好的体验。
2 You can apply for our educational exchange if you are aged between 14 and 17.如果
你的年龄在14至17岁之间，你就可以申请参加我们这个教育交流活动了。
apply for申请。如：
He applied for the job to be a manager in the company.
他申请担任该公司经理职位。
Application可数名词，意为“申请表”
Please fill in the application carefully.
3 have a reference from your head teacher右一封班主任的推荐信
reference推荐信；介绍信。have a reference from sb来自某人的推荐信。
4. They may also miss their families and friends.
Miss此处用作动词，意为“怀念，思念”。
I miss my grandparents in the countryside.
Missing形容词，意为“不在的，丢失的”
5. To deal with culture shock, you can...
Deal with 意为“处理，对付”
I don’t know how to deal with this matter.
拓展：deal with 常与how搭配，do with则多与what 进行搭配。
How will you deal with the camera?=What will you do with the camera?
【随堂练】
一单项选择。
( )1 - Have you ever joined an educational exchange?
- No,I
A．do B. don't C. have D. haven't
( )2 We for the same junior high school last year.
A. applying B. apply C. Applied
( )3 If you take part in our educational exchange, you to another country
A. travel B. will travel C. travelled D travelling
( )4 They eight English songs so far.
A. learn B.learned C.has learned D.have learned
( )5 She hasn't found her dog——,but she's still trying.
A. already B.yet C.ever D.never
二单词拼写。
1 If you love to travel and meet new people, you can j_____ the educational
exchange.
2 1 went to Africa last summer and talked with some l_____ people about their way
of life.
3 Young people should r_____ the old and help them.
4 When l was on the educational exchange in Germany last year,l had a good time
living with my h_____ family.
5 I keep in t _____with my friends by email.
三完成句子。
1现在就参加我们的教育交流活动！
_____ _____ _____ our educational exchange right now.
2李华想申请加入乒乓球俱乐部。
Li Hua wants to____ _____the Table Tennis Club.
3我只能给你提供关于这件事的一点点信息。
I can only give you_____ _____ _____ information about it.
4她到现在还对此事一无所知。
She_____ _____anything about it so far.
5起初，他对写作不感兴趣。
He was not interested in writing____ _____.
第十讲
单元语法——时态--现在完成时
一． 基本结构：助动词have/has+过去分词(done)
二． 句型：
否定句：主语+have/has+not+过去分词+其他.
一般疑问句：Have/Has+主语+过去分词+其他.
简略答语: Yes, 主语 + have/has.(肯定)
No, 主语 + haven't/hasn't.(否定)
三．用法
（1）现在完成时表示过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果
I have spent all of my money (so far).(含义是:现在我没有钱花了.)
Guo zijun has (just/already) come. (含义：郭子君现在在这儿)
My father has gone to work.(含义是:我爸爸现在不在这儿)
（2）现在完成时可以用来表示发生在过去某一时刻的,持续到现在的动作（用行为动词表示）或状态（be动词表示）常与for（+时间段）,since（+时间点或过去时的句子）连用.
①for+时段
②since+过去一个时间点（译为：自从……以来）
③since+时段+ago
④since+从句（过去时）
⑤It is+时段+since+从句（过去时）
Mary has been ill for three days.
I have lived here since 1998.
四、has gone (to),has been (to), has been (in) 的区别
Have/Has gone(to) :去了(现在不在说话现场)
Where is your father？He has gone to Shanghai.
Have/Has been (to) :去过（已不在去过的地方）
My father has been to Shanghai.
Have/has been in：呆了多久（还在所呆的地方）
My father has been in Shanghai for two months. /since two months ago.
五．现在完成时的标志
1. 现在完成时的含义之一是过去完成的动作对现在仍有影响,用以下四大标志词可以表达这种含义:
* 以already, just和yet为标志
He has already got her help. 他已得到她的帮助。
He has just seen the film. 他刚刚看过这场电影。
He hasn't come back yet. 他还没有回来。
* 以ever和never为标志
This is the best film I have ever seen. 这是我曾经看过的最好的一部电影。
He has never been to Beijing. 他从没有到过北京。
* 以动作发生的次数为标志
He says he has been to the USA three times. 他说他已经去过美国三次了。
* 以so far（到目前为止）为标+before
He has got to Beijing so far. 到目前为止他已到了北京。
She has passed the examso far. 到目前为止她已经通过了考试。
2.过去已经开始的动作一直延续到现在, 甚至有可能继续延续下去,我们可以从动作“延续”的特性和“时间”点段的区分入手,进一步学习现在完成时。
注意：过去已经开始的动作一直延续到现在, 甚至有可能继续延续下去,我们可以从动作“延续”的特性和“时间”点段的区分入手,进一步学习现在完成时。
英语中的动词从词义上可以分为延续性和非延续性两种,在现在完成时态中一定要注意动词这一特性,应将这类非延续性动词转换为延续性动词。
英语中有些动词表示的是一种短暂的动作，没有持续性，即“一发生就结束”的动作，这类动词一般称为“非延续性动词”(亦叫点动词或瞬间动词或终止性动词)，在现在完成时中，不能同表示一段时间的状语或How long连用。常见的这类动词有：go, come, leave, arrive, lose, join, borrow, die, begin. 这些动词如果要跟一段时间连用，必须改成相应的具有延续性的词。主要一些动词变化形式如下：
非延续性动词
延续性动词
现在完成时形式
buy
have
He has had this motorcycle for two years.
borrow
keep
She has kept this book for three weeks.
leave
be away
They have been away from home for two days.
arrive/reach/
get/move
be in/at
Kitty has been in Hong Kong for a month.
come/go
be in/at
My mum has been in Beijing for two months.
begin/start
be on
The film has been on for an hour.
stop/finish/end
be over
The meeting has been over for two hours.
die
be dead
The lamb has been dead for some time.
join
be in/be a member of
Simon has been a member of the Football Club since last year.
become
be
How long has your sister been a teacher?
open
be open
The shop has been open for ten hours.
close
be closed
The market has been closed since 2010.
get married
be married
They have been married for fifteen years.
get up
be up
They have been up for two hours.
come back
be back
The lost cat has been back since last night.
fall asleep
be asleep
The dog has been asleep for several hours.
go out
be out
The old man has been out since last Friday.
catch a cold
have a cold
How long have you had a cold?
时间“点”、“段”须分清过去开始的动作可以延续到某一点结束,也可能继续延续,这时就要根据时间“点”、“段”选择相应的介词for或since。
现在完成时常见的时间状语有：for+一段时间；since+过去的某个时间；so far, yet, recently, over/in the last/past +一段时间；（once, twice, ）three…times, never, ever, up to now, these days
使用注意事项：
a) 非延续性动词可用于现在完成时，但不能与表示一段时间的时间状语连用；
The train has arrived.火车到了。
The train has been here for two hours. 火车到这里已经两个小时了。
The boy has left. 那个男孩走了。
The boy has been away for two days. 那个男孩离开已经两天了。
b) 表示一段时间的时间状语一般为：
①How long…?
②for +一段时间；
③since+一点时间。
c) 非延续性动词的否定形式可以与一段时间连用。
He hasn’t left home for a month.
I haven’t seen you for a long time.
注意：
1)现在完成时不能单独与过去的时间状语连用, 如yesterday,last week, three years ago 等;
2)不能与when连用
3.现在完成时往往同表示不确定的过去时间状语连用
【随堂练】
一、【中考链接】
1．Hello，this is Lily speaking．Could I speak to Mr. Black?
Sorry．He______ the Xuanwu Lake Park．
A. has been to B. went to
C. has gone to D. will go to
2.Would you like to see the film with me?
I'm sorry I __________it twice.
A. see B. will see
C. have seen D. am seeing
3. In the past few years there __________great changes
in my hometown.
A. have been B. were
C. had been D. are
4.Kitty, will you go to see the film -Cold Mountain this evening?
No, I won't. I ___________it already.
A. saw B. have seen
C. see D. will see
二、选用have或has填空
1. I visited the museum.
2. you ever been to Beijing?
3.My mother made a lot of apple juice.
4. he watched the film?
5.Mrs Brown bought some bread and milk.
三、单项选择
( )1.Miss Smith isn’t in the office. She to the classroom.
A.has gone B.went C.will go D.goes
( )2. The students have cleaned the classroom, ?
A.do they B.don’t they C.have they D.haven’t they
( )3.We each other since2002.
A.know B.had known C.have known D.knew
( )4. Harry Potter is a very nice film. I it twice.
A.will see B.have seen C.seen D.see
( )5.—Has he used one?
---No,he hasn’t. He has used a mobile phone.
A.ever;ever B.never; never C.ever;never D.never;ever
四、按要求写句子
1. The woman has found her bag.
(1) (改为否定句)
(2) (改为一般疑问句并作肯定回答)
2. They have completed their homework.
(1) (改为否定句)
(2) (改为一般疑问句并作否定回答)
3.Has he cleaned the room?
(1) (作肯定回答)
(2) (写出肯定句)
4.Have they lost their way?
(1) (作否定回答)
(2) (写出否定句)
课堂巩固
一.单项选择
1. I'm free every day today.
A. in B. on C. Except D. besides
2. The room is everything.
A. full with B. fill of C. fill with D. filled with
3. Her jacket her １００ yuan .
A. pays B. spends C. buys D. costs
4.-Would you please take part in my birthday party? . '.
A. Thank you very much Ｃ. Thanks for telling me
C.Yes, I＇ll go ' D.I'll be glad to
5. During winter vacation, I sleeping late.
A. used to B. was used for
C. was used to D. use to
6. It's time for class. We'd better go to our classroom as _ as we can.
A.slowly B.quickly C.quietly D.easily
7. (2013 .江西模拟)
-lt looks like a television. Do you think so?
-Yes, I .
A. understand B. know
C. mean D. agree
8. Drinking and smoking are your health.
A. good for B. bad for
C. good to D. bad to
9. The expressions you use might depend whom you are speaking to. '
A. to B. on C. at D. with
10. Tom succeeded passing the final exam.
A. in B. to C. on D. at
二．单词拼写
1. I’ve invited a special g_________ to our party. Guess who?
2. ----I’m going to take part in the running race tomorrow.
----Wish you s___________!
3. Mr Wang is a nice teacher and all of us r_______and love him.
4. When you go to a new place, you should be friendly to the l________people.
5. From his smile we know he’s g________.
三、完成句子
1. 至今为止，他已经在这家公司工作了十年了。
He has worked in this company for ten years_________ ____________.
2. 起初，老师们都认为他不时学习的料。
_________ __________ , all the teachers thought he had no ability to study well.
1. 你什么时候来中国看我？
When will you _________ _________ __________ China and see me?
2. 参加教育交流是一次了不起的体验。
_________ ___________ a fantastic experience _________ __________an educational exchange.
3. 每个人都应该受到尊重。
Everyone __________ __________ ___________.
第十一讲
Unit6
◆知识探究
Step one Reading & Listening讲解
1. Now they’ve given up and sailed away! 现在他们已经放弃，并且驾船离开了！
give up “放弃，戒除”，此处作及物动词短语时，宾语可以是名词、代词或动名词，但是不能接动词不定式。
Don’t give up your dream.
You must give up smoking.
注意：give up的宾语如果是代词，必须置于give与up之间，不能放在give up之后。
2. The Greens didn’t want to take it with them. 希腊人不想带走它。
take sth. With sb. 某人随身携带某物
You should take a pen and a notebook with you when you take part in a meeting.
3. Get some help and pull it into the city. 帮忙把它拖进城里。
pull动词， “拖，拉”， pull ... into... “把......拉入/拖入“
pull out “把......从......拉出来”。 pull的反义词为push（推）
They are pulling the boat into the sea.
He pulled the boy out of the hole.
5. That night, in the main square of the city, all the Trojans celebrated.
那天晚上，在城市主广场，所有的特洛伊人都在庆祝。
（1） main形容词，意为“主要的”，作前置定语，没有比较级。其副词形式是mainly
The teacher asked us to write down these main points.
The book is mainly about how to cook all kinds of food.
(2) celebrate动词，“庆祝，祝贺”，其名词形式为celebration
All the Chinese people are celebrating the Spring Festival.
6. They sang and danced around the horse, and made jokes about the stupid Greeks.
他们围着木马唱歌、跳舞，取笑愚蠢的希腊人。
（1） make jokes about sb./ sth. 拿某人/某物开玩笑
You shouldn’t make jokes about the poor girl.
have a joke with sb.与某人一起说笑话
play a joke on sb 戏弄某人=make fun of= laugh at
tell jokes 讲笑话
（2） Greek n 希腊人 adj 希腊的 Greece 希腊
7. By midnight, the main square was empty, except for the huge horse.
(1) by此处作介词，表示时间，意为“不迟于，到......时（为止），在......之前”
They were tired by evening. 他们到了晚上就很疲倦了。
Can you finish the work by tomorrow? 你能在明天以前完成工作吗？
by 通过+Ving
Match them with the correct countries by writing the letters in the brackets.
（2） empty此处作形容词，“空的”，反义词为full（满的）
empty还可以作动词，意为“倒空，使成为空的”，反义词为full（填满）
Let’s empty the glass. 让我们干杯。
（3）except for 除.......之外，只是
e.g.The room is tidy except for the carpet.除地毯外，房间很干净。
【辨析】except; except for; besides
except “除......之外”表示“例外、排除”，表示排除的是同类事物或行为。
E.g. He gets up early every day except Sunday.除了星期天外，他每天都早起。
except for “除......之外”，它后面的宾语一般为句子里所涉及的内容并非同类事物或行为
E.g. The story is well written except for a few spelling mistakes.
除了几个拼写错误外，这个故事写得很好
besides“除......之外还有”=in addition
E.g. We all went swimming besides him. 除了他以外，我们也都去游泳了。
8.The horse was full of Greek soldiers! They quietly climbed out of the horse one by one.
（1）be full of= be filled with
e.g.The glass is filled with milk.= The glass is full of milk.
（2） one by one 一个接着一个 step by step一步步
9. In one night, they succeeded in capturing it through a clever trick.
在一夜之内，他们靠一个计谋成功地夺取了它。
（1） succeed in doing sth = do sth successfully成功地做了某事
（2）success 不可数名词 “成功 成就”
Both plans have been tried without success.两个计划都已试过，但未获成功
可数名词“成功的人或事”
The plan was a great success.这项计划极为成功。
（3）successful adj 成功的 a successful teacher 一个成功的老师
10. Only a few people know about this information. 只有少数人知道关于这个信息的情况。
only a few “只有几个”， 修饰可数名词复数
Only a few people live in the viliage.
There are only a few apples on the tree.
【拓展】not a few 相当多
There are not a few people on the beach.
11. I want to join the army in the future. 将来我想参军。
辨析： in the future与in future
in the future
将来，未来
表示将来较长的一段时间
in future
以后，今后
表示离现在较短的一段时间，相当于from now on
What will happen in the future? 将来会发生什么？
Don’t be late in future. 今后不要迟到。
助词：
长( in the future)的长（将来较长的一段时间），短( in fututr) 的短（离现在较短的一段时间）
10. My dream is to be a soldier. 我的梦想是成为一名士兵。
动词不定式短语to be a soldier 在句中作表语。
My dream is to be a writer.
【拓展】动词不定式（短语）作表语，一般表示动作还没有实现，而如果表示动作正在发生，则用动名词（短语）作表语。
My hobby is collecting stamps. 我的爱好是集邮。
该句时态不是现在进行时，而是一般现在时，其中collecting是动名词形式，collecting stamps在句中作表语。
11. The Greek army disappeared and left a wooden horse outside the city of Troy.
希腊军队消失了，在特洛伊城外留下了一匹马。
（1） 遗留；留下I’ve left my umbrella on the bus. 我把伞忘在公交车上。
（2） 离开 When did you leave London? 你什么时候离开伦敦的？
（3） leave for 到......地方去I’m leaving for Beijing next month.下个月我要去北京。
（4） 放置；听任 leave him alone.别管他
辨析：leave与forget
leave
leave sth. sp. 把某物忘在某地
指因粗心而没有带某物或某物落在某处，其后往往接一个地点状语
forget
forget sth. 忘记某事/某物
指大脑不能记起或回忆不起过去的事情，反义词是remember
助词：忘记某物真特殊，后有地状（地点状语）用leave
14. What did the king of Sparta do in the end? 最终斯巴达国王做了什么？
in the end 最后。
We have no idea who will win in the end, but we’ll try our best.
我们不知道最终谁会赢， 但是我们都会拼尽全力。
15. He asked many of the other Greek kings to help him_________Troy and punish the Trojans.
他召集其它希腊国王一起_____________特洛伊，惩罚特洛伊人。
punish v. 处罚； 惩罚。如：
The drunk driver was punished by the police. 酒驾司机被警察处罚。
Sam was punished by her parents for breaking their neighbor’s window.
萨姆把邻居家的窗户打破了，受到了父母的惩罚。
【随堂练】
一、根据句意及首字母提示完成句子。
1.His grandfather died in the Anti-Japanese W___________.
2.Which is more difficult to u___________, English poetry or Chinese poetry?
3.My brother joined the army last year and became a s___________.
4.This is the m___________ street of the town.
5.Many countries in the world c___________ Mother’s Day.
二、单项选择
1. ( ) I didn’t ________ my brother had told me a lie.
A. catch B. reply C. understand D. realize
2.( ) Do you think soy milk is different ________ milk?
A. with B. from C. like D. as
3.( ) Many old houses around our school ________ next year and a large green area will appear.
A. pull down B. will be pulled down C. will pull down D. are pulled down
4.( ) It is stupid ________ Tom to say that.
A. for B. to C. of D. From
5.( )He tried to act ________what he saw just now.
A. as B.on C.. out D.for
6.( ) Emma got the first prize in the competition! Let’s go out to _________.
A. encourage B. celebrate C. understand D.develop
7.( ) Ben, the fridge is _________now. it's time to go to the supermarket.
A. empty B.huge C.full D.fresh
8. ( )Finally we succeeded _______________the heavy box into the classroom.
A. pull B.to pull C. pulled D.in pulling
9. ( )The car entered __________the house through a kitchen window.
A. in B. to C.at D./
10. ( ) We’re busy because we have so ___ housework to do today.
A. few B. little C. many D. Much
三、 完成句子
1．他收集了许多不同种类的卡片。
He has collected ________ ________ ________ of cards.
2. 你为什么不尝试着给他发一封电子邮件呢？
________ ________ ________ ________sending an e-mail to him?
3. 要不是坐了一位老妇人，公共汽车就是空的。
________ ________ one old lady, the bus was empty.
4. 军人必须服从命令。
________ have to ________ orders.
5.他拉开了门。
He ________ the door ________.
Step Two Speaking ＆ Writing
1. Denise has gone to work.
“have/has gone to+地点名词”意为“为了某地”。
His father has gone to Shanghai.
——Is James at home?
——No, he_______Ya’an to be a volunteer.
A. has gone to B.has been to C.is going to
2. How much does a ticket to Tokyo cost?
A ticket to...意为“......的票”，其中to为介词，意为“关于”,类似的还有：
The answer to the question
The key to the door
3. There once was a man called Ed Heath...
Called Ed Heath在句中作后置定语，called+名词做后置定语，意为“叫.......的”，此时，called可以用named代替，表示与它所修饰的名词之间存在着被动关系。
Do you know the boy called Jim?
4. He is looking down at the empty sea.
Look down意为“向下看，俯视”，如果接宾语则需加介词at
Don’t look down.
【随堂练】
一、 根据汉语提示完成句子。
1. What ’ s the Canadian way of ___________(理解) the world?
2. More than half of ___________（加拿大人）have British or French ancestors.
3.Canada has two official ____________(语言)
4.Canadians believe that people must respect and__________ (包容）each other and help each other.
5.We should ___________ (尊重)those who are old.
6.Words cannot__________(描述)her beauty.
7.Nearly 70____________(百分之的)of the fund was supplied by the government.
8. His office is in the___________ (中心）part of the city.
二、单项选择
1.（ ） All the students went on a school trip _____Tom because he will ill on that day.
A besides B beside C except D except
2. （ ）All the students like the new teacher _______ Bob.
A about B from C between D except
3. （ ）After he said good-bye _____,he left.
A rudely B politely C carefully D quietly
4.（ ） I saw a stranger _______the building.
A enter B entered C to enter D enters
5.（ ） The student’s parents want to see him______his study.
A success B.succeed C.succeed in D. success in
6. （ ）Most of my classmates don’t like to talk with their parents,but I am _____with them , I love to talk to my parents.
A.the same as B. different from C. pleased with D. good for
7.（ ）We are _____ age.
A same B the same C different D the different
8 . （ ）This photo is ______from that one , can you find your______between them?
A. different； differents B.different； differences
C.difference； differents D.difference；differences
9. （ ）I can’t think ____ his name at the moment.
A. over B. of C. about
10. （ ）The doctor ____ the crying baby, but he couldn’t find out what was wrong with it.
A. looker over B. looked after C. looked for D. looked out
三、书面表达
假如你是一名导游,负责陪同外宾游览苏州，车子开到虎丘山(The Tiger Hill）门口时，你在车子上用英语向他们讲几点说明，内容如下,开头语已写好。
1.在虎丘山逗留3小时，11点开车,请记住车号，
2.下车时带好贵审物品(valuable things),不要忘记
3.要求大家跟你一起参观。
4. 祝大家玩得愉快。
Ladies and gentlemen, we are now at the gate of the Tiger Hill.___________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
范文： Ladies and gentleman, we are now at the gate of the triger Hill. Before we get off the bus, I have something to tell you. We will stay at the Tiger Hill for 3 hours, and them we will leave here at 11 o’clock. Please remember the car number. When you get off the bus, please take your valuable things with you and don’t forget to close the window.
Please follow me to visit the hill. I’ll tell you some interesting stories about the hill. Have fun!
Step three-More Practice 讲解
1. He asked him to make 100000 arrows within ten days.
100000在英语中读作“one hundred thousand”,英语中没有数词，“万，十万”，因此“一万”应读成“ten thousand”; “十万”读成 “one hundred thousand”
Within介词，意为“在......以内，不超过”
He will return within three hours.
2. I’ll bring you 100, 000 arrows in three days.
“in+一段时间”意为“一段时间以后”，句中的时态只能用将来时态，对“in+一段时间”提问需用how soon(多久以后）
How soon will they come back?
In a week.
1. Zhuge Liang asked his soldiers to fill 20 large boats with many straw men.
Fill...with...意为“把......装/填满
Hurry to fill the bag with gold.
Fill...with..的被动结构为be filled with,意为“......被装/填满”，相当于be full of
The glass is filled with juice.
The room is filled with people.
【随堂练】
一、单项选择
（ ）1. –Will you go to the concert tonight?
-- I’d love to. But unluckily all the tickets were sold out __________ a few hours.
A. before B. within C. after D. without
（ ）2. Look! The museum is on _______ of the street.
A. other side B. other sides C. the other sides D. the other side
（ ）3. The police came and ordered the crowd _________ at once.
A. leave B. to leave C. leaving D. leaves
（ ）4. I __________ this picture for many times in different places.
A. see B. was seen C. have been seen D. have seen
（ ）5. ________ it __________, please. I want to see the back of it.
A. Turn; on B. Act; out C. Turn; around D. Find; out
二、 单词拼写
1. A w____________ man will face the difficulty instead of being afraid of it.
2. After the war, a s_________ wrote a book about his experience.
3. Excuse me, when does the ship s_________ from London to Paris?
4. He wants to know how people live on the other s_______ of the world.
5. “Don’t move, or I’ll s_______,” he said with a gun in his hand.
三、 用所给词的正确形式填空。
1. She said some things a little __________(difference) from you.
1. I have a few questions _______(ask).
2. It will be very ________(wind) tomorrow.
3. Hello! This is Tom ________(speak).
4. Chinese and Japanese are ___________（Asia）。
四、完成句子
1 以前到家后，我会把电影再表演给孩子们看
I used to come home and ______ ________ the movie for the kids.
2. 他终于明白了健康的重要性。
________ ______ _________ , he understood the importance of health.
3. 她的眼里充满泪水。
Her eye were _______ ______ tears.
4. 我们都开他的玩笑。
We all ______ ______ ______ him.
5. 我们骗你的，丹尼。
We _______ your ,Danny.
第十二讲
单元语法——时态--现在完成时（补充）
（一）现在完成时的定义和结构
基本结构
定义（使用情况）
例句
常用提示词
have/has + 动词过去分词
表示过去发生或完成的动作对现在的影响
She has already finished her work.
My sister and I have just seen Avatar.
already; yet;
never; ever;
for ; since等
表示动作从过去已经开始，一直持续到现在
We have been here for six years.
Janet has worked for this factory since 1996.
(1) 当主语是第三人称单数时用has,其余人称用have
(2)
过去分词：规则动词的过去分词构成与动词过去式相同；不规则动词需要特殊记忆
缩略形式：I have=I’ve; you have=you’ve; we have=we’ve; they have=they’ve;
he has=he’s she has=she’s it has=it’s
have not=haven’t; has not= hasn’t
选用have或has填空
1. I visited the museum.
2. you ever been to Beijing?
3.My mother made a lot of apple juice.
4. he watched the film?
5.Mrs Brown bought some bread and milk.
（二）用法
（1） 现在完成时表示过去发生或已经完成的动作对现在造成的影响或结果。如：
I have spent all of my money so far. 到目前为止我已花光了所有的钱。
（含义是：现在我没有钱了。）
My father has gone to work.我爸爸已经上班去了。 （含义是：我爸爸现在不在这儿）
（2）现在完成时可以用来表示发生在过去某一时刻的，持续到现在的动作或状态,常与for（+时间段），since(+时间点或过去时的句子)连用。
如：Mary has been ill for three days. 玛丽已经病了三天了。
I have lived here since 1998. 我从1998年起就一直住在这儿。
（三）现在完成时的时间状语
①already, yet, just
already意为“已经”， yet意为“已经，还，但是”，already一般用于肯定句中，yet一般用于否定句和 疑问句中。just意为“刚刚”。 表示动作发生在过去某个不确定的时间，但对现在有某种影响和结果。
He has already got her help. 他已得到她的帮助。
He has just seen the film. 他刚刚看过这场电影。
yet用在疑问句中意为已经，在否定句中意为仍未，常放在句末。如：
---Has he found his dog yet?他已经找到他的狗了吗？
---No,not yet.不，还没有。
He hasn’t come back yet.他还没有回来
Exercise: 选词填空
Jack is not hungry. He has (already/yet) eaten.
Jack is hungry. He has not eaten (already/yet).
Have you eaten (already/yet) ？
②ever , never
ever“曾经”, never“从不”，twice, three times，表示说话前发生过一次或多次的动作，现在成为一种经验。
如： I have been to Beijing twice.我去过北京二次。
He says he has been to the USA three times. 他说他已经去过美国三次了。
This is the best film I have ever seen. 这是我曾经看过的最好的一部电影。
He has never been to Beijing. 他从没有到过北京。
Exercise: 选词填空
— Have you ____ (ever/never) visited Guangzhou?
— No，I’ve _____(ever/never) visited Guangzhou.
③since, for
表示从过去某一时刻开始一直持续到现在的动作或状态。这个动作可能刚停止，可能仍然在进行。时间标志是for（+一段时间）, since（+具体时间点）。
1. for+一段时间。表示“有（多长）一段时间了”。如：
His mother has been ill for a week.他妈妈已经病了一个星期了。
I haven't seen her for four years. 我有四年没见到她了。
2. since+过去一个时间点。
since+时间段+ago.如：表示“自从…以来”
He has taught here since 1981
他自1981年就在这儿教书。 （可能还要继续教）
She has stayed in Guangzhou since three months ago.她自三个月前就一直待在广州。
用never, already, yet, since或for填空
1. He has________ read the book twice.
2. Have you worked on the farm________three years ago?
1. –Haven’t you had your breakfast ________?
-Yes, I have.
4. The Wangs have lived in the old house ________ about thirty years.
5. The little boy has ________ seen his mother , so he doesn’t know her.
④have gone to，have been to
have gone to 意为“到某地去”，尚未回来，说话时该人不在现场。
have been to 意为“曾经去过某地”，现在人已回来了。
Exercise:
(a).—How many times ________ you ___________ there?
— I __________ _ there twice.
(b).Mary ________ _____ to America. We can’t find her now.
(c). — Where is Jim？ —He’s not here. He ___________________ England.
(d). My father _____________________ Beijing twice. 我爸爸去过北京两次。
随堂练习：
单项选择
( )1.（2012中考）---I’ve got the final Harry Potter book.
---You will love it. I it twice already.
A.am reading B.have read C.was reading D.will read
( )2.（2009中考）Sally has returned to Guangzhou, ?
A.did she B.didn’t she C.has she D.hasn’t she
( )3.Miss Smith isn’t in the office. She to the classroom.
A.has gone B.went C.will go D.goes
( )4. The students have cleaned the classroom, ?
A.do they B.don’t they C.have they D.haven’t they
( )5.We each other since2002.
A.know B.had known C.have known D.knew
( )6. Harry Potter is a very nice film. I it twice.
A.will see B.have seen C.seen D.see
( )7.—Has he used one? ---No,he hasn’t. He has used a mobile phone.
A.ever;ever B.never; never C.ever;never D.never;ever
（四）现在完成时与一般过去时
一般过去时和现在完成时所表示的动作都发生，但要注意以下区别：
1. 现在完成时强调过去发生的动作对现在的影响或过去开始发生一直持续到现在的动作与特征词since, for, already, yet, ever, never, so far, up to now等连用。如：
-----Would you like to see the film with me? 你想和我一起去看这部电影吗？
-----No. I’ve seen it twice. 不了，我已经看了两遍了。（过去已看过，所以现在不想看了）
2. 因为for, since 引导的时间状语都表示持续的一段时间，所以必须和持续性动词连用，不可与短暂性动词连用。如：
我哥哥的自行车买了有两年了。
错误表达：My brother has bought this bike for two years. (buy是短暂性动词)
正确表达：My brother has had this bike for two years. (have是持续性动词)
3. 一般过去时强调动作发生在过去，与现在无关。与具体的表示过去时间的状语（如：yesterday , last night）连用。如：
I saw the film last night. 我昨晚看了那部电影。（仅是对过去事情的陈述）
【随堂练】
一、单项选择
1.--- you your homework?---Yes, I have.
A.Do;done B.Did; do C.Have;done D.Have;do
2.-- you to Xi’an? --Yes, I went there last month.
A.Did;went B.Are; going C.Have;gone D.Have; been
3.—Is your mother in New York?----No,she America.
A.has never gone to B.has never gone C.has never been to D.has never been
4.---Why do you stand outside your room? ---Because I my key in it.
A.have forget B.have forgotten C.have leave D.have left
5.—When will you do your work? ----I just it.
A.have;done B.was; done C.was; doing D.is; doing
6.You around the world. Let’s start next week.
A.have traveled B.haven’t traveled C.don’t have traveled D.are traveling
7. He to the space station and he will reach there one day.
A.been B.has been C.han’t gone D.hasn’t been
8.-Have you finished your English homework ? -No, not .
A; already; yet B. already; already C. yet; already D. yet; yet
9. So far, we 2,000 English words
A. learned B. am learning C. have learned D. am going to learn
10. She ________more than three hundred stamps so far.
A. will collect B. has collected C. collected
二、完成句子
1 以前到家后，我会把电影再表演给孩子们看
I used to come home and ______ ________ the movie for the kids.
2. 他终于明白了健康的重要性。
________ ______ _________ , he understood the importance of health.
3. 她的眼睛饱含泪水。
Her eye were _______ ______ tears.
4. 我们都开他的玩笑。
We all ______ ______ ______ him.
5. 要不是坐了一位老妇人，公共汽车就是空的。
________ ________ one old lady, the bus was empty.
课堂巩固
一、单项选择
1. ( ) In the past ten years, great changes________ place in my hometown.
A. took B.takes C.have been D. Will taken
2. ( )He has been at our school________.
A. for two years ago B for two years C.since two years D.two years ago
3. ( )----________have you been away from here?
----for about ten years
A. How soon B.How long C. How far D. How often
4. ( )This composition is good _____ a few mistakes.
A.except B. Except for C.besides D.but
5. ( )Wang qing succeeded _______ a job in the famous company.
A. to get B. to getting C.in getting D. get
6. ( )--Hello,May I speak to Kate?
---Sorry, she isn’t here now. She ______to Shanghai.
A. went B.has been C.has gone
7. ( )He has never visit Shenzhen,________?
A. has he B.hasn’t he C.does he D.doesn’t he
8. ( )He is a funny boy,he often makes us_______.
A. laugh B. to laugh C.laughing D.to laughing
9. ( )The teacher asked the students _________in class.
A. not make noise B.not making noise
C.not to make noise D.don’t make noise.
10. ( )---Have you packed your beach towel_______?
---Yes , I have_______packed it.
A. already , already B.yet , yet
C.already ,yet D. yet ,already
二、根据句意和所给单词的首字母补全单词。
1. The soldier r_________down the stairs and said, “Captain, they have gone.”
2. “We have won!” all the citizens of Troy c__________.
3. In one night, they s___________in capturing the city with a trick.
4. When his mother came in his room, that boy p____________to be asleep.
5. China is in Asia and England is in E_______________.
6. He is a soldier. He has been in the a_______________ for about two years.
7. The general o__________his soldiers to fire.
8. They often made jokes about the s___________Greeks.
三、用所给词的适当形式填空。
1. —_you____________(buy) a newspaper yet?
—Yes, I have. I____________(buy) it two hours ago.
2. —Where is Mr. Green, do you know?
—He____________(go) to England, and he____________(return) in two weeks.
3. —Who made you___________(laugh) in class?
—I was made____________(laugh) by his jokes.
4. He got the best job___________(success). In other words, he_________(success) in getting it.
5. —Is Zhang Ying____________(tall) girl in your class?
—Yes, she is____________(tall) than any other girl in our class.
四、 完成句子
1. 我们半小时内达到。
We’ll arrive ____________ ___________ ____________ _____________.
2. 往杯子里灌满牛奶。
___________ the glass ___________ milk.
3. 他们调转车头去看发生了什么事。
They ___________ their car ___________ to see what happened.
4. 谢谢你的礼物，我很喜欢。
__________ ___________ _________ your present. I like it very much.
5. 超过两千人到该影院观看这部电影。
__________ __________ 2,000 people went to the cinema to watch his film.
五、 完形填空
We are lucky to have many things. However, most of us usually waste them.
Electricity is one thing that we ___1__ most. Lights, TVs,___2__and other things are often kept on even when no one is using them. We should turn them off.when we do not need them. It ___3___less than a second to do it.anyhow,not wasting electricity can save money because we do not have to ___4____the electricity we do not use.
The second thing that we often waste is water. Fresh water is valuable.____5____it shouldn’t be wasted. It is only a simple matter of turning off a
tap. I am sure that____6___can do this easily if he wants to do.
Another big waste is food.my mother ____7___cook too much food and much of it was thrown away.I told her we had wasted so much ___8___.she thought i was right and now she cooks only what we can eat.
It is not right to be wasteful. I find there is a simple___9__of not wasting things. That’s to use only what we ___10__. Do not touch what we do not need. In this way we can stop being wasteful.
1. A. produce B.waste C.use D.save
2. A.computers B.watches C.phones D.cookers
3. A.brings B. gives C.keeps D.takes
4. A.afford B.save C.pay for D.care for
5. A though B.because C.so D.but
6. A.nobody B.something C.everything D. Nothing
7. A.planned to B.used to C.was able to D. Was afraid to
8. A.electricity B.water C.food D.money
9. A.way B.thing C.plan D.project
10. A.buy B.get C.bring D.need
第十三讲
Unit7
◆知识探究
Step one Reading & Listening讲解
1. When we make new memories, we lose old ones.
当我们形成新的记忆时，就会推动旧的记忆。
lose(lost, lost)及物动词，“失去，丢失”。可指因事故或过失失去原有的东西，也可指人陷入深思中。
I can’t write to Mr Green because I have lost his address.
2. Because they enjoy learning about memory. 因为他们喜欢了解记忆力。
enjoy及物动词，“享......之乐，欣赏，喜欢”，后接名词，代词或动名词作宾语，不能接动词不定式。 Enjoy doing sth. 喜欢做某事
Many people enjoy traveling during holidays.
【拓展】enjoy后接反身代词，反射代词就应在人称和数上与enjoy的主语保持一致，enjoy oneself与hav a good time和have fun同义，“玩得开心”。
Did you enjoy yourselves at the party last night?
= Did you have a good time / have fun at the party last night?
1. Because they want to help students improve their memory.
因为他们想帮助学生提高记忆力。
because连词,“因为”，其后接从句，陈述原因或理由，用来回答why引导的特殊疑问句。
-- Why isn’t Li Ping here?
-- Because he is ill.
注意：because 从属连词，引导原因状语从句，在英语中because 和so不能同时出现在一个句子中，只能用其一，与汉语表达不同。有类似用法的还有although(though)与but，它们也不能同时出现在一个句子中。
辨析：because与because of
because
连词
引导原因状语从句，表示直接明确的原因或理由
I don’t buy the shirt because it is too expensive.
because of
介词短语
后接名词、代词或动名词，不能接句子
He can’t take a walk because of the rain.
2. To write it down. 把它写下来。
write down 写下，记下，是动副短语，如果名词作宾语，一般位于write down之后中，也可位于writh和down 之间；如果代词作宾语，必须位于writh和down 之间。
Please write down these new words.
The word is important. Please write it down.
5. A great way to help you remember something is to imagine a picture of it in your
mind.
帮你记住某件事的一种有效方法就是在大脑里想像出它的一副画面。
(1)动词不定式短语to help you remember somthing作定语，修饰名词短语a great way; 动词不定式
to imagine a picture of it in your mind作表语。
I have a lot of work to do today. 我今天有很多工作要做。 (动词不定式作定语)
He had no chance to go to school thoese years. 那些年，他没有机会上学。 （动词不定作定语）
His dream is to be a doctor. 他的梦想是成为一名医生。 （动词不定式作表语）
（2） help sb with sth 在某方面帮助某人 help oneself （to）请自便
with the help of 在......方面帮助某人 can’t help doing sth 忍不住做某事
（3） imagine 想象 +名词、动名词、从句
e.g.We can’t imagine life without any hardships.
---Do you know Neil Armstrong?---Yes. He is the first man_______on the moon.
A.walk B.walks C.to walk D.walked
6. If you make the picture big, strange or silly，you will remember it better.
如果你把这幅图画想象地很大、很奇怪，或是很愚蠢，你将会更好地将它记住。
（1）if 引导的条件状语从句，条件状语从句中的动词多用一般现在时，主句中的动词多用一般将来时，即主将从现原则.
I shall go if she asks me.
（2） make +sth.+adj. 形容词作宾语补足语 make sb. do sth. 让某人做某事
（3） remember to do sth.记得去做某事 remember doing sth. 记得做过某事
7. This makes it the longest word in the world.
当不定式、动名词、从句等复杂成分用作宾语且其后跟有宾语补足语时，通常会在宾语补足语前使用形式宾语it，而将真正的宾语移至句末，其基本结构为“动词+it+宾语补足语+不定式(动名词或从句)”。
如： I find it difficult to do the job well. 我发现做好这件事不容易。
8. Remember ：a picture is worth a thousand words.记住：一副图画，值1000个单词。
be worth +V. ing 值得......的
e.g. This house is worth a lot of money.
The film is worth seeing.
翻译：这个茶杯值30元。____________________________________
9.A good method for remembering the spelling of a word is to make a short sentence with each other of the word.
（1）a method for+ doing sth. 一个做......的方法
（2）不定式作表语表示具体动作或将来动作；
①To be kind to the enemy is to be cruel to the people.
②My chief purpose is to point out the difficulties of the matter.
③What I would suggest is to put off the meeting.
当主语和表语都是不定式时，其含义一是条件，一是结果（例①）。
当主语是aim,duty,hope,idea,mista ke,plan,purpose,suggestion等为中心词的名词词组（例②）时， 或以what引导的名词性分句（例③），不定式说明主语的内容。
10. .For example, to remember the word“smiles”, we can imagine there is a “mile”
between the first letter and the last letter.
（1） between...and...两者之间。 （2）to=in order to 表目的“为了”
11. For example, if you want to remember how to spell the word”because”,......
疑问词who,what,which,when,where,whether,how后可接不定式构成不定式短语，句中作主语、宾语、表语等。
①When to leave for London has not been decided yet. （不定式在句子中做主语）
②Mr. Smith didn't know whether to leave or stay there. （不定式在句子中做宾语）
③I asked Professor Xu how to learn English well. （不定式在句子中做直接宾语）
④The question was where to get the medicine needed. （不定式在句子中表语）
以上例句中疑问词+不定式部分，均可转换为相应的从句形式。
如：①When we shall leave…③…how I could learn……
经常在这种结构中使用的动词有：
consider,decide,discover,explain,find out,forget,hear,know,lea rn,observe,understand,wonder等。
11. You will forget something very quickly unless you understand it well.
如果你没有理解的话，你很快就会忘记它。
（1） unless= if ...not 引导条件状语从句“如果不；除非”，也要遵循“主将从现”原则
e.g.Unless he studied hard, he will never pass the exams.
（2）forget to do sth 忘记去做某事 forget doing sth 忘记做了某事
Sorry,I forgot to bring the book.(对不起，我忘了带书了。)
I forgot borrowing a book from you.（我忘记曾经向你借过书这件事）
（3） forget quickly , understand well 副词修饰动词
13.It’s easier to remember these steps if you understand how the water cycle works.
动词不定式作主语时常用it作形式主语，而往往将动词不定式放在谓语或表语之后。
如： It's not easy to learn a foreign language well. (=To learn a foreign language well is not easy.)
学好一门外语不容易。
在此句型中，如果要说明动词不定式的动作是谁做的，可在不定式前加一个for 引起的短语，作不定式的逻辑主语。
如： It's difficult for us to finish the work. 对我们来说，完成这项工作很困难。
It's hard for me to answer your question. 要我回答你的问题很难。
但是，如果表语是kind, nice, right, wrong, clever, polite 等描述行为者的性格、品质的形容词，则应在不定式前加一个of 引起的短语。如：
It's very kind of you to help me.你能帮我，真好。
14. How to scientists think about that sound similiar?
科学家对发音相似的单词是怎样认为呢？
（1） sound此处作连系动词，”听起来“，其后通常接形容词作表语，常见短语：sound like听起来像，后跟名词
The music sounds very nice. 这音乐听起来十分悦耳。
Paris sounds like a city that I like. 巴黎听起来像是我喜欢的城市。
(2) similiar 相似的，类似的，常见短语be similiar to与......相似
We have similiar opinions. 我们有着类似的观点。
Mary’s hat is similiar to Jane’s. 玛丽的帖子和简的差不多。
【随堂练】
一、根据句意和括号里的提示完成句子。
1.I__________(lose)my ruler yesterday.
2. It made me _____________(想起)my own visit to Beijing.
3. Reading a lot can___________(提高) your English.
4.Han Liang doesn’t do well in English. His__________(拼写)is bad.
5. The book is worth_____________(读).
二、单项选择
1. Our team lost____________ the team from No. 6 Middle School.
A. on B. at C. in D. to
2. I___________, so I didn’t know where I was.
A. lost B. was lost C. lose D. am lost
3. Please remember___________the candles when you leave.
A. to blow off B. blowing out C. to turn out D. to blow out
4. Don’t forget___________the window.
A. close B. to close C. closing D. closed
5.—We can use this special pen to record or take pictures.
—Really? Will you please show me____________it?
A. how to use B. what to use C. why to use
6. -- How do you like Yi Yundi? -- A cool guy! His music _________ really beautiful.
A. tastes B. sounds C. smells D. Looks
7. -- Can you tell me the differences between these two pictures?
-- Differences? Oh, no. The look quite ______.
A. different B. similiar C. strange D. Interesting
8. If you ______ your name on the paper, you can get a magazine.
A. cut down B. look down C. turn down D. write down
三、完成句子
1.除非政府同意另外给钱，否则这家剧院就得关门了。
_________ the government___________extra money, the theatre will have to close.
2. 你知道如何让我们的环境更干净吗？
Do you know___________ __________ __________environment___________?
3. 他应该停止戴那个傻傻的耳环，
He should stop to_________ __________ __________ __________?
4. 我希望你的身体状况得到改善。
I hope you will__________ __________health.
5. 不要忘记喂鸟.
__________ _________ __________feed the bird.
四、阅读理解
Do you love the holidays, but hate the increase (增加) in weight（体重） that follows? You are not alone.
Holidays are happy days with pleasure and delicious foods. But many people are worried about the weight that comes with these delicious foods. With proper (合适的) planning, it is possible to control your weight. The idea is to enjoy the holidays but not to eat too much. You don’t have to turn away from the foods that you enjoy. The following advice may be of some help to you.
Do not miss meals. Before you leave home for a party, have a small, low-fat meal or fast food. This may help you to keep you from getting too excited before the delicious foods.
Begin with clear soup and fruit or vegetables. A large glass of water before you eat may help you feel full. Use a small plate; a large plate may make you eat more than enough.
Better not have high-fat foods. Choose lean (脂肪少的) meats. Fill your plate with salad and green vegetables.
If you have a sweet tooth, try mints (薄荷) and fruits. They do not have fat like cream and
chocolate.
Don’t let exercise take a break during the holidays. A 20-minute walk after a meal can help you burn off excess calories (多余的热量).
1. Holidays are happy days with pleasure but they may__________.
A. bring weight problems B. bring you much trouble in your life
C. make you worried about your life D. make you hate delicious foods
2. Enjoy your holidays without putting on weight, and you’d better_________.
A. drink much water and have vegetables only B. not eat much food in high fat
C. not take part in the parties D. turn away from delicious foods
3. According to the passage,_________is a necessary part to stop you from putting in weight.
A. vegetables B. water
C. salad D. taking exercise
4. Many people can’t help putting on weight after the holidays because they_______.
A. can’t control themselves B. go to too many parties
C. enjoy delicious foods D. can’t help turning away from the foods
5. Excess calories can be found in your body in the form of (以…的形式)__________.
A. energy B. fat C. food D. water
Step Two Speaking ＆ Writing
【随堂练】
一、单项选择
1. –Don’t forget ________ your homework, John. -- OK. I’ll do it right now.
A. doing B. do C. to do
2. I practice spoken English with foreigners in order to ________ my listening.
A. involve B. improve C. increase D. control
3. This maths problem is too difficult. Can you show me ________, George?
A. what to work out B. to work it out
C. how to work it out D. how to work out it
4. The book is well worth ________. I plan _________ one.
A. read; to buy B. reading; buying C. reading; to buy
5. __________you don’t leave now, you’ll be late for school.
A. Whether B. Unless C. If D. When
6. You won’t feel happy at school _________ you get on well with your classmates.
A. though B. when C. unless D. because
7. We have a lot of trouble __________ to the top of the hill before eight o’clock.
A. get B. to get C. got D. getting
8. I like drinks _______ tea and pop.
A. for example B. such as C. like D. B and C
二、阅读理解
Jack is a clerk of a bookstore. Here is the note from his boss. Ben. Jack has to decide what books to order according to the following note and the descriptions of the books.
Hi, Jack,
You must hand in the order list of books to me by the first working day of every month. The rules for choosing books are:
For textbooks:
●August is coming. We must choose all textbooks, without thinking of other rules.
For books which are not textbooks:
●If more than five copies of books were sold last month, we choose them. But if
there are five copies or more in stock（现货）, we do not make an order.
●If the wholesale（批发）prices of the books are higher than $75, we do not choose them. And we do not order anything whose retail (零售) price is higher than $100.
Ben
The descriptions of the books
Title: Homeland English
Publisher（出版社）：Homeland Ltd
Wholesale price: $100
Retail price: $ 140
Textbook: Yes
Copies sold last month: 3
Copies in stock: 2
Title: How to become successful
Publisher：Founders Company Ltd
Wholesale price: $25
Retail price: $40
Textbook: No
Copies sold last month: 2
Copies in stock: 1
Title: Biology at a Glance
Publisher：New Times Publisher Ltd
Wholesale price: $70
Retail price: $ 95
Textbook: No
Copies sold last month: 18
Copies in stock: 3
Title: Good Health in 20 Days
Publisher：Oscar World Ltd
Wholesale price: $50
Retail price: $66
Textbook: No
Copies sold last month: 10
Copies in stock: 20
1.( ) Jack much hand in the order list to his boss by ___________.
A. the first day of last August B. the last working day of this month
C. the last day of next Auguse D. the first working day of each month
2. ( )If Jack wants to buy the books about success, he should order them form ________.
A. Homeland Ltd B. Founders Company Ltd
C. Oscar World Ltd D. New Times Publisher Ltd
3. ( )The whole price of the book ___________ is over $ 100.
A. homeland English B. good Health in 20 Days
C. biology at a Glance D. how to become successful
4. ( )The number of the books sold best last month is ___________________.
A. 3 B. 10 C. 18 D. 20
5. ( ) Jack can’t buy Good Health in 20 Days because ___________.
A. it is not a school textbook B. its wholesale price is too high
C. the copies in stock are more than 5 D. the copies sold last month are over 5
Step three-More Practice 讲解
【随堂练】
一、根据句意及提示完成句子
1. The photos made her __________(remember) his visit to Sydney.
2. The little girl gets _______(lose).
3. Work hard________(improve) your English.
4. I know Peter can improve his _________(spell).
5. His m________(大脑)encourage me all the time.
6. – What do you think Lily’s idea?
--I think it’s _________(傻傻的). That doesn’t help me.
7. Jim is doing his homework. Let me clean the house ________(代替)of him.
8. Yancheng Science and Technology Museum, opened in May, is a wonderful place for children. It is well w______ visiting.
二、单项选择
( ) 1. lf it __________rain this weekend, we'll have a picnic.
A. doesn't B. didn't C. won't D. wouldn't
( ) 2. Jack is bored. Please tell him __________ to make him cheerful.
A. interesting thing B. thing interesting C. interesting something D. something interesting
（ ）3. To tell you the truth, I don't know____________money from the ATM.
A. how to take out B. how take in
C. what to take out D. what take in
（ ）4. I have trouble __________the English teacher. He speaks too fast.
A. understand B. to understand C. understanding D. to understand
( ) 5 David's memory is________than mine.
A. good B. better C. best D, the best
( ) 6 I won't lend you my car _________ you promise to return it before 12:00.
A. if B. unless C. so D. but
( ) 7 How many methods does the article ________to improve our memory?
A. punish B. control C. mention D. invent
( ) 8 Many old memories _________of my mind when I saw those photos.
A. took out B. put out C. died out D. poured out
( ) 9 Wood____if you _____it into water.
A. floats; put B. will float; will put C. floats; will put D. will float; put
( ) 10 Mo Yan is a famous writer. His books are worth_________.
A. read B. reading C. to read D. to reading
三、完成句子
1.你真傻，不肯原谅别人的错误。
_________ ________ _________ ________not to forgive others for their mistakes.
2. 她逐步地学会了说英语。
She learnt to speak English __________ _________ _________.
3. 丹尼在中国的风俗习惯方面有些麻烦。
Danny __________ ________ _________ Chinese customs.
4. 除非你努力学习，否则你的英语考试将不及格。(unless)
You’ll fail in your English exam _______ _________ ________ ________.
5. 除非你有地图，否则你很容易迷路。
_______ ________ ________ ________ ________, you will get lost easily.
四、阅读理解
Look at the instructions on the bottle of the medicine and then choose the right answers.
John is twelve years old. He had a bad cold and coughed day and night. He went to see a doctor. The doctor gave him some cough medicine.
Cough Medicine
Shake(摇动) it well before use. Take it three times each day before
meals.
Dose(药量):
Age: over 14,2 teaspoonfuls (勺)
8 - 13,1 teaspoonful
4 - 7,1/2 teaspoonful
Not right for children below the age of three. Put it in a cold place. Use it before December 1 st,
2003.
1. John should take _____ a day.
A. 2 teaspoonfuls B. 3 teaspoonfuls C. 4 teaspoonfuls D. I teaspoonful
2. Tile medicine should be kept in __.
A. a fridge B. hot water C. any place D. the sun
3. John should ___ before he takes it
A. shake the medicine well B. eat nothing C. do some exercise D. drink a cup of tea
4. When people are __ years old, they cannot take this medicine,
A. eighty B. thirty C. two D. twelve
5. John will ____ the medicine Mien it is left after Dec. 1st ,2003.
A. throw away B. stop to take C. take once D. take six times more
第十四讲
Grammar
A. If 引导的条件状语从句（2）
在if引导的条件状语从句当中，如果从句谈论的是一个有可能发生的事情及其产生的相关结果，从句用一般现在时，主句用一般将来时。
If he comes to the party,everyone will be happy.
如果他来参加聚会，大家都会很开心的。
He will help you, if you ask him.
如果你请他帮忙，他会帮你的。
如果if条件句谈论的是一种真理或者客观事实时，主句和从句均使用一般现在时。
如：If you take a fish out of water,it does.
如果你让鱼儿离开水，它就会死。
The room becomes dark if you turn off the lamp.
如果你关灯，房间里就一片漆黑。
If …not…与unless
Unless=if …not除非；如果不
如：除非你现在出发，否则你就不能及时赶到那儿。
Unless you start right now,you will not get there in time.
If you don’t start right now,you will not get there in time.
You will not get there in time unless you start right now.
You will not get there in time if you don’t start right now.
说明：if或unless引导的条件状语从句位置灵活，可放于句首，也可位于主句的后面。当if或unless从句位于句首时，后面通常加逗号和主句隔开。
（2013年中考）
we continue making too much rubbish, the problem will not only get worse.
A. When B. Whether C.Why D.If
you go to bed earlier at night,you won’t
in the morning.
(2010年中考)
如果你早点睡，早上就不会感到疲惫。
We won’t go out if it tonight.
随堂练：
一、单项选择
1.If you to join an educational exchange, you must apply for it first.
A.rain B. will rain C. is raining D.rains
2.In hot water,food goes bad easily it is kept in the fridge.
A.want B.wanted C. wants D.wanting
3.---Great news ! The Backstreet Boys will come to our city next week.
---Really? they come,my brother will be very happy.
A. Unless B.If C. Before D.So
5.---May I play the computer game?
---No, you promise to finish your homework first.
A. unless B.if C. but D.so
6.They the Great Wall unless it .
A.will visit,will rain B. will visit.rains
C. visit.will rain D.visit,rains
7.---You won’t pass the quiz you don’t study hard for it.
---OK.I’ll try my best.
A.and B.unless C.if D.but
8.You won’t learn Maths well you work hard.
A.since B.unless C.if D.because
9.If I find your dog,I you a call.
A.give B. gave C. giving D.will give
10.Mr Brown will come to party if he too busy tomorrow.
A.is B.isn’t C.will be D.won’ t be
二、用括号内所给的词的适当形式填空
1.If he (come )tonight,he will meet you at the party.
2.If the weather (get) worse,we will have to stay inside?
3.If the rain (stop)soon,will you go to the cinema with me?
4.I (buy) a new mobile phone if I (have)enough money.
5.If you (drop)a glass,it (break).
三、根据句意，用if或unless连接句子
They won’t understand you.You speak too fast.
She won’t play the piano well.She keeps on practising it every day.
I’m free this weekend.I’ll go to the library.
A dog barks.It is angry.
You take a fish out of water.It dies.
巩固练习
一、 单项选择
is important to study English well.
A. This B. That C.It D.What
Do you know your memory?
A. how improve B. how to improve C.what improve D.what to improve
you go to bed early at night,you won’t feel tired in the morning.
A. If B. Unless C.So D.Before
You can try to exercise your brain.
A.new something B. something new C.new thing D.thing new
Your mother will be happy if you in your study.
A.succeed B. succeeded C.succeeding D.succeeds
二、 单词拼写
1. ---How can I i my memory?
---You should exercise your brain, live a heathy life and stay relaxed.
2. I’ve lost my w , so I can’t buy you anything now.
3 - How do you go to work?
- I t _______a bus.
4 If you want to keep fit, you should have a h ______diet
5 Look! We've already picked a b_____of apples
三、完成句子。
1我的爷爷奶奶在乡下过着宁静的生活。
My grandparents__________ _________quiet________in the countryside.
2你需要放慢脚步，享受生活。
You need to________ ________
and enjoy your life
3如果你试着玩一下这个游戏，你会喜欢上它的。
you try this game, you________ ________it
4为了改善生活，他们来到了这座大城市。
_________ _________their life, they came to the big city
5锻炼大脑是很重要的。
__________ ________important_________ ________your brain.
四、单项选择：
( )1. lf it __________rain this weekend, we'll have a picnic.
A. doesn't B. didn't C. won't D. wouldn't
( )2.Jack is bored. Please tell him __________ to make him cheerful.
A. interesting thing B. thing interesting
C. interesting something . D. something interesting
( )3.To tell you the truth, I don't know____________money from the ATM.
A. how to take out B. how take in
C. what to take out D. what take in
( ) 4.I have trouble __________the English teacher. He speaks too fast.
A. understand B. to understand C. understanding D. to understand
( ) 5 David's memory is________than mine.
A. good B. better C. best D, the best
( ) 6 I won't lend you my car _________ you promise to return it before 12:00.
A. if B. unless C. so D. but
( ) 7 How many methods does the article ________to improve our memory?
A. punish B. control C. mention D. invent
( ) 8 Many old memories _________of my mind when I saw those photos.
A. took out B. put out C. died out D. poured out
) 9 Wood____if you _____it into water.
A. floats; put B. will float; will put C. floats; will put D. will float; put
) 10 Mo Yan is a famous writer. His books are worth_________
A. read B. reading C. to read D. to reading
第十五讲
Unit8
◆知识探究
Reading
词汇
1. competition n. 比赛；竞赛
He is in competition with three other people for promotion.他与其他三位对手角逐晋升的机会。
2. treasure n. 珍宝；宝物
She owns many treasures.她收藏了许多珍宝。
【提示】treasure表示“珍宝，宝物”时，是可数名词，且通常用复数形式；但表示“财富；珠宝”时，是不可数名词。
【链接】v. 珍视；珍爱；珍藏
I will treasure those memories forever.我会永远珍藏那些记忆。
3. text n.文本
The text is accurate and informative.文本内容准确，信息量大。
【提示】text un.表示“文本”时是不可数名词，但表示“文稿；讲稿；课本；课文”时是可数名词。
【链接】v. 用移动电话发送短信。
Text me when you are ready.准备好就给我发短信。
4. chance n.机会；机遇
Paul has waited for that chance for a long time.保罗等待那个机会已经很长时间了。
【提示】chance还有表示“可能性”的用法：
A by any chance（用于询问）可能；也许
Are you, by any chance, going into town this afternoon?今天下午你会到镇上去吗？
B no chance（非正式）不可能
- Perhaps your mother will give you the money.
- No chance.
也许你母亲会给你那笔钱。
不可能。
1. confidently adv. 自信地
She walked confidently onto the platform and started her speech.她自信地走上讲台，然后开始发表演说。
【链接】confident adj.自信的；confidence n. 自信；自信心
2. topic n.话题
The topic of the lecture is whales.讲座的话题是鲸。
3. winner n. 优胜者
The winner’s prize is a new car.获胜者的奖品是一辆新轿车。
【链接】win v.赢得； 获胜
4. advise v. 建议
【提示】是常用动词。现将它的几种常见用法归纳如下：
A advise+名词代词。如：
What would you advise?你有什么建议？
Mr. Li advised Lisa after she failed the Maths test.莉萨数学测验不及格，李老师给她提了一些建议。
B advise+sb.+不定式短语。在这个句式中，不定式短语作advise的宾语补足语。如：
He often advises people to do more exercise.他常常劝人多锻炼身体。
C advise+动词-ing形式。如：
He advised going to London for the holidays.他建议去伦敦度假。
D advise+sb.+against+(doing)sth.表示“建议某人不做某事”。如：
The lawyers have advised us against signing the contract.律师建议我们不要签订这份合同。
【链接】advice un. Take my advice and stop doing that!
1. several det. 几个；一些
【提示】several 作定语，“几个”， 此外，several可作代词。
Several boys were injured.
Several of us decided to walk home.
2. opinion n. 意见；想法
I wasn’t asking for your opinion, Dick.
3. whole adj. 整个的；全部的
Do you want to know the whole story?
【链接】whole n. 整体；全体
【比较】all与whole
1. 都可与单数名词连用，含义大致相同，位置不同；all放在冠词、指示代词、形容词性物主代词等之前，而whole则放在这些词后。如：all the family the whole family
2. 和复数名词连用，两者意思有所区别；all指“全部；每一个”；whole指“整个”。如：All the buildings were burning.
Whole buildings were burning.
3. 在大多数不可数名词这前用all，不用whole。如：
所有的钱 the whole money× all the money 所有的酒 the whole wine × all the wine
4. 在表示地点的专有名词之前，一般用all而不用whole。如：
all China全中国，也可以说成 the whole of China
4. suggestion n. 建议；提议
He followed her suggestion of a walk along the river.
【链接】suggest v. 建议；提议
5. communicate v. （与某人）交流信息；沟通
My mother communicates with me well.
【链接】 communication n. 交流；沟通 We were in close communication with each other.
6. whenever conj. 在任何---的时候；在任何---的情况下
She always went to that church whenever she was in that area.
短语句式
1. in public “公开地；在别人（尤指生人）面前” You should not make jokes about her in
public.
1. put on “上演” The band hope to put on a show in the UK before the end of the year.
put on “穿上；戴上” She put on her coat and glasses and then went out.
put on “增加（体重）” I eat a lot, but I never put on weight.
2. take part in“参加（---活动）”
【比较归纳】
A. join
1) 指加入某个党派、团体组织等，成为其中一员；
When did your elder brother join the army?
She joined the Dancing Club last week.
2）指参与；加入到---之中，与take part in含义相同；
500 employees of this company joined the strike yesterday.= 500 enployees of this company took part in the strike yesterday.
B. join in 多指参加活动；与take part in 含义相同；
Come along, and join in the ball games.= Come along, and take part in the ball game.
C. take part in 多指参加活动；
She’ll take part in the discussion tomorrow.
Jack took part in the singing contest yesterday.
注意：take part in 是惯用词组，part前一般不用冠词，但当part前有形容词修饰时，要用不定冠词；
D. attend “出席；参加”，指参加会议、婚礼、典礼、听报告等；
He’ll attend an important meeting tomorrow.
I attended Professor Li’s lecture last week.
3. The students had to speak on a topic in English for two minutes. 同学们必须就一个话题用英语演讲两分钟。
on “关于；就”，about 意思相近
The teacher tests us on irregular verbs.
in English“用英语”； in “用”
Say it in German. She wrote in pencil.
4. speak to “对---说；与---交谈”，与talk to意思相近
He looked aside when I spoke to him.
5. ‘d better= had better 后常用动词原形，“最好（做某事）”，常用于表达建议、劝告等
You’d better wash your hands first.
You’d better go to see the doctor at once.
否定形式had better not Simon, you’d better not go there alone.
1. in my opinion“依我看” in one’s opinion“依某人之见”这是表达观点时的常用说法
You didn’t do anything wrong, in my opinion.
In my opinion, your plan will work.
2. head teacher“校长”，英式英语; 美式英语用principal
give a speech to“给---做演讲”
Doctor Li gave a speech about trees to us last week.
3. communicate with “与---交流”
Love is the best way to communicate with children.
I can communicate with foreigners very well.
4. above all“最重要的是；尤其是”
You have your family to consider above all.
Above all, you must be independent.
随堂练：
Complete the sentences with proper words.
1. Alice won first prize in the singing and she will represent our school to take part in the national final.
2. When you speak in public, don’t be shy. You should speak .
3. When I travelled in Hangzhou, I bought silk scarves for my grandma.
4. More and more people are using the Internet to with each other nowadays.
5. You can drop in you are free. I’m retired and always stay at home.
6. Susan me to go to the dentist’s because I had a bad toothache.
7. Professor Wang will give us a on how to use computers for our studies next Friday afternoon.
8. You should not give this away. It’s time for you to get a job and start your new life now.
1. The world is becoming smaller and smaller with the development of modern communication.
2. Do you have any on ways of improving the working conditions?
第十六讲
Grammar
A Modal verb: should 情态动词should的用法
1. should“应该；应当”，情态动词，多用于劝说他人的错误行为或给予他人一些建议，使用时后面须跟动词原形，人称没有形式上的变化。
Iwe 我我们
You 你你们 should do some work tonight.
HeSheItThey 他她它他（她）们
2. should否定形式，should not(shouldn’t)“不应该；不应当”
You shouldn’t sit in the sun all day.
They shouldn’t spend too much money.
3. 常用I should或we should表达“对自己而言该做些什么”
I should go home. It’s midnight.
We should invite them for a meal.
常用I shouldn’t或we shouldn’t表达“对自己而言不该做某事”
I shouldn’t spend too much money.
常用you shouldshouldn’t来向他人提出建议
You should look for a better job.
You shouldn’t drive so fast.
4. 用should Iwe---来向他人寻求建议
Should I write my name here?
What should I say to Helen?
I need a new passport. Where should I go?
5. 常用I think we should及I don’t think you should等来表达自己的观点
I think we should get a new car.
I don’t think you should believe him.
6. 还可以用do you think I should---?来寻求建议
He hasn’t replied to my email. Do you think I should phone him?
What do you think I should give Tom for his birthday?
B had better had better的用法
1. had better“最好”，用于表示对别人的劝告、建议或表示一种愿望，语气比should更婉转。had better后面也接动词原型，没有人称变化。缩写’d better
You had better go to hospital at once.
Tom, you’d better go there today.
2. had better的否定形式是had better not，缩写形式为’d better not
You had better not miss the last bus.
You’d better not leave for Nanjing the day after tomorrow.
3. 可以用于指现在。
You had better listen to the radio now.
You had better be quiet.
也可以用于指将来。
You had better start tomorrow.
We had better buy the more expensive one. It will last much longer, so it will be cheaper in the end.
4. had better在表示对别人进行劝告、建议时，不宜用于与陌生人、长辈及上级的交谈中。对长辈说话时，比较有礼貌的说法是It might be better for you----, It would be better for you---等。
It might be better for you to help me, Grandpa.
随堂练：
一、单项选择题
1. _______ the last day of the English Week, the head teacher gave a speech to the whole school.
A. In B. On C. At D. /
2. What an ________ you give us!
A. amazing advice B. good news C. wonderful suggestion D. interesting suggestion
3. _____, he is the oldest of all. We should respect him.
A. In all B. At all C. After all D. Least of all
3. -- Amy looks very __________.
-- Yes, she is singing the song _______. Good for her!
A. confident, confidently B. confident, confident
C. confidently, confident D. confident, confidently
4. --How long ______ you ________ English?
--About 9 years.
A. did, learn B. are, learn C. do, learn D. have, learnt
6. Everyone thinks Avatar is well worth _______.
A. see B. seeing C. to see D. sees
7. Oh, it’s almost 9:00 o’clock. The train will leave in half an hour. You ______ take a taxi to the railway station.
A. can B. may C. had better D. had better not
8. Making pictures in your mind _______ also a good way for you to memorize things.
A. is B. are C. has D. have
9. --I’m sorry. I forgot to bring your textbook.
--Never mind. I will borrow _______.
A. some else B. someone’s else C. someone else’s D. someone’s else’s
10. Tom has been in the factory ________ he left school.
A. when B. since C. as soon as D. for
二、语法选择题。
Evans lives in a city. He was a maths ___11___ three years ago. He taught __12_ and his studentsliked him. So he decided to work in the middle school all his life. ___13__ a terrible accident changed his fortune(命运).
One spring he took his class to __14__ a place of interest. The children saw a lot of ___15__ things and had a good time there. But ___16___ their way back to school, their bus was hit by a truck because the young driver was drunk（喝醉酒的）. Five students __17__and more than half of the children were
__18___ in the accident. He didn’t know how it had happened and was very__19__ it and after he came out of hospital, he left the school and became a _20_. He tried his best to stop the drivers from breaking the traffic regulations违反交通规则. He worked hard and was strict with the drivers. So the drivers were afraid of him.
11. A. worker B. teacher C. reporter D. farmer
12. A. well B. nice C. good D. badly
13. A. So B. And C. Or D. But
14 .A. build B. break C. visit D. find
15. A. terrible B. dangerous C. safe D. interesting
16. A. on B. in C. at D. to
17. A. left B. lived C. died D. fell
18. A. beat B. hurt C. touched D. stopped
19. A. sad about B. afraid of C. interested in D. worried about
20. A . soldier B. policeman C. bookseller D. cleaner
三、完型填空。
From Monday to Friday, most people are busy working or studying. But in the evenings and weekends, they are 21 and enjoy themselves. Some watch television or go to the cinema, others 22 sports, this is decided by their own interests. There are many different ways to spend our free time. Almost everyone has some kind of hobby: it may be something from 23 stamps to making model planes. Some hobbies are very expensive, but others don’t cost anything 24 . Some collections are worth a lot of money, others are valuable（有价值的）only to their owners.
I know a man who has a 25 collection worth （值得several thousand dollars. A short time ago, he
bought an unusual fifty-cent piece which 26 him $250! He was very happy about it and thought the price was all right. On the other hand, my youngest brother collects 27 . He has almost 600 of them, butI wonder if they are worth any money. 28 , to my brother, they are quite valuable. 29 makes him
happier than to find a new match box（火柴盒）for his collection.
That’s what a hobby means, I think. It is something we 30 to do in our free time. The value in dollars is not important, but the pleasure it gives us is.
21. A. lucky B. clever C. funny D. free
22. A. think about B. join C. take part in D. take care of
23. A. collecting B. getting C. printing D. making
24. A. first of all B. at all C. of all kinds D. in all
25. A. book B. cloth C. stamp D. coin
26. A. spend B. took C. cost D. waste
27. A. stamps B. match boxes C. pens D. model planes
28. A. So B. However C. Because D. But
29. A. Nothing B. Everything C. Anything D. Something
30. A. have B. need C. enjoy D. like
八年级上册第一单元测
（总分：100 分考试时间：60分钟）
学校：________ 姓名：________
题号
一
二
三
四
五
六
总得分
得分
得
分
一、首字母填空（每小题1分，共10分）
1. Dinosaurs lived on Earth before h_________ beings.
2. You have the a_________ to do the job well. I’m sure of it.
3. I opened the door, but there was n_________ in the room.
4. Lots of animals d__________ out every year because of pollution.
5. Mary’s hobbies i___________ swimming and singing.
6. If you w_________ the match, you’ll get a new bike.
7. He was b___________ in a poor family.
8. Mary isn’t in the classroom. Let’s ask Jenny i_____________.
9. The i________of the cell phone was very important to the world.
10. It doesn’t matter. N ______knows me here.
得
分
二、单项选择。（每小题1.5分，共30分）
( ) 1. Nobody was looking for me, ________?
A. were they B. wasn’t they C. weren’t he D. weren’t they
( )2. I need ________ for my article.
A. important something B. something important
C. an important something D. a something important
( )3. --Who taught her Japanese? --_______. She learned it by herself.
A. Nobody B. Anybody C. Somebody D. Everybody
( )4. The football team played well, but they didn’t ________ the match.
A. score B. do C. succeed D. win
( )5. The Smiths moved to China ten years ago and______here since then.
A.has lived B.was living C.live D.have lived
( )6. .---How many students are there in your school?
---_______the students in our school ______over two thousand.
A.The number of ;is B.The number of;are
C.A number of;is D.A number of;are
( )7.Would you like______orange?
A.any B.some C.a D.an
( ) 8.I think the cap_____your clothes very well
A. looks like B.fits C.matches D.compares
( ) 9. The price of that house is too____. I can’t afford it
A. high B.low C.cheap D.expensive
( ) 10. What about the red skirt?---It looks ____but it’s too big
A. bad B.nice C.expensive D.heavy
( ) 11.You are unaware of the tiny computer, ______?
7. do you B.don’t you C.are you D.aren’t you
( ) 12. The expressions you use might depend ____whom you are speaking to.
A. to B.on C.at D.with
( ) 13. ——Excuse me, sir. The shoes are a bit small for me.
——Don’t worry. I’ll change them for a _______ size.
A.smaller B.smallest C.larger D.largest
( ) 14. I think Bob is the most suitable person to take the job because he can do the work well with _________ money and ________ people.
A. less;less B.less;more C.more;fewer D.less;fewer
( ) 15. Lucy’s mother ________ a teacher in a big school. She is kind to all her students.
A. works out B. works as C. works in D. works on
( ) 16. Sam is an excellent engineer. ________ ,he is a good footballer.
A. in trouble B. in time C. in addition D. in future
( ) 17. We use the mouse for ________ the computer.
A. control B. controls C. controlled D. controlling
( ) 18. I bought a nice computer yesterday, but it isn’t ______yours.
A as expensive as B expensive than C as expensive than D more expensive as
( ) 19. You always ask others for help. Why not learn to_______yourself?
A turn on B put on C go on D depend on.
( ) 20. Some computers________bigger than cars in the past.
A are B were C is D was
得
分
三、完型填空。 （每小题1分，共10分）
A poor woodcutter and his wife lived in the forest in a small hut. __1__ was so small that there was space only for him and his wife to sleep.
One cold night, somebody knocked __2__ the door. The woodcutter asked his wife__3__ the door and let the stranger in. she said, “But there is no space.” The man laughed__4__ said, “Two can sleep well, three can sit.” And then the woman opened the door. The stranger __5__ to come in, and they all sat telling stories to each other.
Then came__6__ knock. The woodcutter told the stranger, “Friend, open the door.” And the man said, “But there is no space.” The woodcutter said, “If three people can sit comfortably, four persons can sit a little __7__ than before.”
The stranger opened the door, and a man entered. Suddenly, there was a strange knock __8__ did not seem to be human’s! The woodcutter said, “Open the door. I know who__9__. It is my donkey.”
Everyone said, “__10___ is the donkey going to stand?” the man said, “Right now we are sitting, when the donkey comes in, we will all stand.
1. A. That
B. This
C. It
D. There
2. A. in
B. at
C. of
D. to
3. A. open
B. opening
C. opens
D. to open
4. A. and
B. so
C. but
D. or
5. A. invite
B. invited
C. was inviting
D. was invited
6. A. other
B. the other
C. another
D. others
7. A. closest
B. closely
C. closed
D. closer
8. A. that
B. who
C. what
D. whose
9. A. knocks
B. knocked
C. is knocking
D. was knocking
10. A. when
B. where
C. how
D. which
得
分
四、阅读理解（每小题2分，共15小题，满分30分）
Chinese writer Mo Yan won the Nobel Prize in Literature in 2012. Mo, who was born in 1955 into a farmer’s family in Gaomi County in Shandong Province, is the first Chinese national to win the Nobel Prize in Literature. In his early years, life was not easy and he experienced hunger(饥饿). These things have influenced Mo Yan’s later writings.
60-year-old Park Geun-hye (朴槿惠) was elected (选举) the new President of South Korea in December, 2012. She becomes the country's first female head of state and her term will last five years from 2013. “I will become a president who puts people’s living before anything else,” She told the cheering people in central Seoul as she accepted her win. “I will keep my promises.”
Barack Obama (born in Honolulu, Hawaii in 1961), who was elected the 44th President of the United States in 2008, has been elected again to a second term, fighting against Republican challenger Mitt Romney. Obama is a graduate of Columbia University and Harvard Law School. His father was from Kenya. And his mother was born in Wichita, Kansas.
( ) 1. When Mo Yan was young, his family might be ______.
A. big B. poor C. rich D. small
( )2. When was Park Geun-hye born?
A. In 1952. B. In 1955. C. In 1961. D. In 1987.
( )3. Where did Barack Obama born?
A. In Kansas. B. In Kenya. C. In Columbia. D. In Hawaii.
( )4. Which of the following is NOT true about the passages?
A. The writer Mo Yan lived in a big city before he got the prize.
B. Park Geun-hye will lead South Korea till the year 2018.
C. Obama fought against his challenger Mitt Romney in the election.
D. Among the three persons, Park Geun-hye is the oldest.
( )5. The three passages may be from ______.
A. an email B. a letter C. news D. an ad
In the sea there are many islands.In its warm waters there are some little ones.We call them“coral islands.”
A coral island is very nice to look at.It looks like a ring of land with trees,grass,and flowers on it.One part of the ring is open to the water.There is a little round lake inside the island.
If you look into this lake,you will see beautiful corals.You may think they are flowers.If you look at a piece of coral,you will see many little holes in it.In each of these holes a very small sea animal has lived.These sea animals make the coral.
They began to build under the water.Year after year ,the coral grew higher and higher.At last it grew out of the water.
Then the sea brought it small trees and something else.After some years,these things changed into earth.Sometimes the wind brought seeds to this earth.Sometimes birds flew over it and brought seeds to the island.
The little seeds grew.In a few years there were plants all over the island.In a few more years there were trees growing there .
So you see,these islands were built little by little.The workers were very small.Do they not teach us a lesson？Can you think what the lesson is？
1. ( )In the sea_________.
A. there are coral islands in all places B. there are some coral islands
C.the water is always warm D. we can see many flowers
2. ( )A coral island looks like_______.
A.a round cake B.trees,grass and flowers
C.a ring of land D.a round lake
3. ( )There are_______in the holes in the coral.
A.flowers B.little corals C.grass D.sea animals
4. ( )How did seeds of trees,grass and flowers come to the coral islands？
A．The wind and birds brought them to the coral islands.
B.Only the wind brought them there C.People brought them there.
D.Fishes brought them there.
5. ( )From the story we learn that_________.
A.small workers can’t do big things B.only big workers can do big things
C.small workers can do big things if they work hard and work for a long time.
D.all small things can do big things.
We know that many animals do not stay in one place.Birds,fish and other animals move from one place to another at a certain time.They move for different reasons:most of them move to find food more easily,but others move to get away from places that are too crowded.
When cold weather comes,many birds move to warmer places to find food.Some fishes give birth in warm water and move to cold water to feed.The most famous migration is probably the migration of the fish,which is called “salmon.”This fish is born in fresh wate but it travels many miles to salt water.There it spends its life.When it is old,it returns to its birthplace in fresh water.Then it gives birth and dies.In northern Europe ,there is a kind of mouse.They leave their mountain homes when they became too crowded.They move down to the low land.Sometimes they move all the way to the seaside,and many of them are killed when they fall into the sea.
Recently,scientists have studied the migration of a kind of lobster.Every year when the season of the bad weather arrives,the lobsters get into a long line and start to walk across the floor of the ocean.Nobody knows why they do this,and nobody knows where they go.
So,sometimes we know why humans and animals move from one place to another,but at other times we don’t.Maybe living things just like to travel.
1. ( )Most animals move from one place to another at a certain time to_______.
A. give birth B. enjoy warmer weather
C. find food more easily D. find beautiful places
2. ( )The fish called “Salmon”spends a long time in_______.
A.salt water B.rivers C.fresh water D.its birthplace
3. ( )Themice in northern Europe move when ________.
A.they give birth B.the place gets too crowded
C.the weather is bad D.they haven’t enough food
4. ( )The lobsters move_______.
A.to the fresh water B.at a certain time C.to the undersea D.to find more food
5. ( ) What is the main idea of the passage?
A.A nimals move to find food more easily
B.The migration of the fish called “salmon”is the most famous migration
C.Living things move from one place to another because they like to travel
D.Sometimes we know why and how living things move from one place to another,but sometimes we don’t .
得
分
五、完成句子。（每题2分，共10分）
1. 我的爷爷奶奶住在乡下。
My grandparents live __________ __________ __________.
2. 你知道恐龙为什么会灭绝吗？
Do you know why dinosaurs __________ ___________?
3. 玛丽出生于一个富裕的家庭。
Mary __________ ___________ ___________ a rich family.
4. 这条裙子是我妈妈缝制的。
The dress _________ _________ _________ my mum.
5. 蝴蝶是一种昆虫。
Butterflies are ___________ _________ __________ insects.
得
分
六、写作（10分）
假如你是Jack,
看了爱因斯坦传记后，写一篇你的读后感。请根据以下提示写一篇70词的英语短文。
书中内容：伟大的发明家和科学家；生于德国一个贫穷家庭；刻苦钻研，成就显著；
读后感：更加了解爱因斯坦；想成为一名科学家；努力学习。
Last week, I read a book about Einstein’s life. ______________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
八年级上册第二单元测
（总分：100 分考试时间：60分钟）
学校：________ 姓名：________
题号
一
二
三
四
五
六
七
八
总分
得分
阅卷人
得
分
一、 首字母填空（每小题1分，共10分）
1.—How fast can the car run?
—It can run at a s ________ of 150 kilometers an hour.
2.We d ________ on each other because we are good friends.
3. These ants are so t ________ that people are always unaware of them.
4. Use your b ________ , and you’ll find a way.
5. My seventy-year-old grandpa is learning to t ________ with the computer.
6.This cartoon film is ____________ than the one I saw last Saturday. (fun)
7.People from Italy are called ___________. (Italy)
8.Carl looks much _____________ than before. (health)
9.Have you decided to take the headmaster’s ____________? (advise)
10.Please answer the ______________ questions. (follow)
得
分
二、单项选择。（每小题1.5分，共30分）
( ) 11. This computer is ________ than that one.
A. expensive B. more expensive C. much expensive D.most expensive
( ) 12. Mary depended ________ her grandparents after her parents died in the accident
A. on B. in C. by D. with
( ) 13. Lucy’s mother ________ a teacher in a big school. She is kind to all her students.
A. works out B. works as C. works in D. works on
( ) 14. Sam is an excellent engineer. ________ ,he is a good footballer.
A. in trouble B. in time C. in addition D. in future
( ) 15. We use the mouse for ________ the computer.
A. control B. controls C. controlled D. Controlling
( ) 16. --- What do you think of the two backpacks?
---________ of them are very nice.
A. Either B. Both C. Each D. All
( ) 17. It usually ______ Mum about half an hour to cook supper.
A. pays B. takes C. spends D. costs
( ) 18. -______ are you leaving for Beijing?
- In a couple of days.
A. How far B. How often C. How soon D. How long
( ) 19. ---Dad, why must I stop _______ computer games?
---For your health, my boy.
A. play B. to play C. to playing D. playing
( ) 20. --- What’s the matter with Della?
--- Well, her parents wouldn’t allow her to go to the party, but she still ________
A hopes so B hopes to C hopes not D hopes for
( ) 21. —Remember______him about it when he comes back. —Sure, I will.
A.tell B.to tell C.telling D.to telling
( ) 22. The flower smells and I like it very much.[
A. well B. good C. bad D. badly
( ) 23. --- Is there ___________ in today’s newspaper?
---- Yes, it is really cheerful to read that a group of _______kids joined the volunteers.
A. anything new; ten-year-old B. something new; ten-years-old
C. anything new; ten-years old D. something new; ten –year-old
( ) 24. It is generous of you to lend me a large __________of money.
A. amount B. number C . lot D. much
( ) 25. The exam is coming. She asked the teacher ______ some advice.
A. to B. for C. of D. at
( ) 26. It’s our duty to keep us .
A. health B. healthy C. healthily D. healthyly
( ) 27. —We can’t live for a long time water.
—I think so.
A. with B. without C. for D. by
( ) 28. Students should learn how __________ problems.
A. solve B. solving C. can solve D. to solve
( ) 29. I heard that they made the murderer __ to jail themselves.
A. to go, instead B. go, instead of C. go , instead D. to go, instead of
( ) 30. ---Can you find the answer ______ the question?
---Yes, it’s too easy.
A. to B. for C. with D. of
得
分
三、完型填空。 （每小题1分，共10分）
One night a man came to my house. He told me, “There is a family with eight 31 . They have not eaten for days.” After I asked him where the family was, I took some 32 with me and left.
When I finally got to that family, I 33 those little children were too hungry to say 34 . There was no sadness in their eyes, just the deep pain of hunger. I gave the food to the mother. She took half of it, and then 35 . When she returned, I asked her, “ 36 did you go?” She gave me this simple 37 , “To my neighbors — they are also 38 !”
I was not surprised that she gave food to others, because poor people are always very kind. But I was surprised that she knew her 39 were hungry when she was also in need of food. Usually, when we are in trouble, we always 40 ourselves first. and we have no time for others.
( )31. A. children B. workers C. farmers D. cooks
( )32. A. flowers B. wine C. food D. water
( )33. A. showed B. found C. looked D. heard
( )34. A. a sentence B. nothing C. it D. anything
( )35. A. went out B. came hack C. rushed in D. hurried back
( )36. A. When B. Where C. How D. Why
( )37. A. question B. decision C. answer D. lie
( )38. A. ill B. unhappy C. tired D. hungry
( )39. A. people B. neighbors C. family D. children
( )40. A. think of B. talk about C. laugh at D. look for
得
分
四、阅读理解（每小题2分，共15小题，满分30分）
A
Airline
Flight number
Destination
Departure time
Gate
Air Canada
137
Beijing
10.12a.m.
24
Japan Airlines
320
Tokyo
10.30a.m.
18
British Airways
405
Paris
11.00a.m.
20
Pan American
226
London
11.20a.m.
12
Pan American
12
Beijing
11.43a.m.
15
Air Canada
178
Tokyo
12.32p.m.
21
CAAC
289
Hong Kong
12.32p.m.
14
( ) 41. If you want to fly to Paris, you should take________.
A. Flight 137 B. Flight 320 C. Flight 226 D. Flight 405
( ) 42. Flight 289 to Hong Kong leaves at_______.
A. 11.43a.m. B. 10.12a.m. C. 12.32p.m. D. 10.12a.m.
( ) 43. A lady wants to take Flight 12 to Beijing, she should go to Gate________.
A. 14 B. 15 C. 12 D. 18
( ) 44. Flight 226 to London is from _________.
A. Pan American B. Japan Airlines C. Air Canada D. CAAC
( ) 45. A man is at Gate 18. He’s going to________.
A. Tokyo B. Hong Kong C. London D. Paris
B
Computers are useful machines. They can help people a lot in their daily life. For example, they can help people to save much time to do much work, and they can help people to work out many problems they can't do easily. Our country asks everyone to learn to use computers before the twenty-first century, except the old people.
Today more and more families own computers. Parents buy computers for their children. They hope computers can help them improve their studies in school. Yet,
many of their children use computers to play games, to watch video or to sing karaoke, instead of studying, so many teachers and parents complain that computers can not help children to study but make them fall behind. So computers are locked(锁) in boxes by parents.
In some other countries, even some scientists also hate computers. They say computers let millions of people lose their jobs or bring them a lot of trouble. Will computers really bring trouble to people or can they bring people happiness?
It will be decided by today's students themselves!
( ) 46. Why do we say the computer is a useful machine? Because ______.
A．our country asks us to learn it B．it can help us a lot
C．we can use it to play games D．it can help us to find jobs
( ) 47. What do many teachers and parents complain about? They complain that ______ .
A．their students and children use computers to play games
B．computers let them lose their jobs
C．computers make their students and children fall behind
D．computers bring people a lot of trouble
( ) 48. What does the underlined word “ complain” mean in the passage?
A．认为 B．谈论 C 抱怨 D 喜欢
( ) 49. Can computers really help children to study?
A．Yes, they can. B．It's hard to say.
C．No, they can't. D．Of course not.
( ) 50. How do you understand the last sentence of this passage? I think it means ______.
A．computers are used by people
B．people can live well without computers
C．one must decide how to use computers
D．computers are strange machines
C
Mr. Turner liked fishing. It was his favorite sport. He often fished for hours
without catching anything. But this did not worry him. Some fishermen couldn’t catch fish. Sometimes they caught old boots or rubbish. Mr. Turner was even worse than the fishermen. He never caught anything—not even old boots. After he spent the whole morning on the river, he always went home with an empty bag.
“You must give up fishing!” his friends said. “It’s a waste of time.”
“But they don’t realize one important thing. I’m not really interested in fishing. I am only interested in sitting in a boat and doing nothing at all. It can make me forget the noise of the city and live quietly for some time.” He always said to himself.
( )51. Mr. Turner always went fishing because .
A. he could sell the fish and get some money
B. he thought it was a good sport
C. he could cook the fish for supper
D. he could sleep in a boat
( )52. Mr. Turner liked to fish .
A. by the river B. in a boat on the river
C. in the river D. with the fishermen
( )53. He always went home with an empty bag because .
A. he couldn’t fish at all B. there weren’t any fish in the river
C. he gave the fish to the fishermen D. he didn’t pay attention to fishing at all
( )54. His friends told him when they knew he couldn’t catch anything.
A. to learn how to fish B. to change the way of fishing
C. not to fish any more D. to buy fish to eat
( )55. From the story we knew Mr. Turner .
A. lived in the country B. was a good fisherman
C. was interested in fishing D. disliked the noise of the city
得
分
五、完成句子。（每题2分，共10分）
56. 人们生病时要依靠医生。
People have to ________ ________ doctors when they are ill.
57 .此外，李老师还是个灌篮高手。
________ ________, Mr Li is a great basketball player.
58. 木马太重了，他们不能随身带走。
The wooden hourse was ________heavy ______them _______ ______with them.
59. 多炎热的天气啊！
___________ ___________weather it is!
60. 你父亲从事什么工作？
What does your father ________ ________?
得
分
六、写作（10分）
请以The Life in the Future为题写一篇记叙文，按下列提示完成。
1. 可以想象一下：未来的生活将会是什么样子的呢？
2. 具体介绍一下未来的生活，很多事情都由计算机或机器人来完成。例如：料理家务、购物、网上聊天、不出门就可以看医生、打扫卫生、做饭等。
3. 为了未来的生活，现在我们应该努力学习，实现理想。
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
八年级上册第三单元测
（总分：100 分考试时间：60分钟）
学校：________ 姓名：________
题号
一
二
三
四
五
六
七
八
总分
得分
阅卷人
一.单项选择.
( )1. I _____ my pen everywhere, but I couldn’t _______it.
A. find out, look for B. looked for, find C. found, find D. look for, found
( )2. He feels _________because his son often doesn’t go to school.
A. angry B. angrily C. happy D. happily
( )3. Is there ____________ on today’s newspaper?
A. something interesting B. interesting something
C. anything interesting D. interesting anything
( )4. --- Would you like ________ coffee?
---No. I’d like __________.
A. any, some B. some, some C. any, any D. some, any
( )5.--- Is __________here? ---No. Bob isn’t here.
A. someone B. anyone C. nobody D. everyone
( )6. Please remember ____________ your homework to school tomorrow.
A. bring B. brought C. to bring D. bringing
( )7. He looks _________ at his son. Because his son is naught.
A. angry B. angrily C. happy D. happily
( )8. His mother ______him stories when he was young.
A. was used to tell B. used to
tell
C. was used to telling D. used to telling
( )9. We will stay at home instead of ______ to the cinema.
A. go B. goes C. went D. going
( )10. ________people are dancing in the park now.
A. Thousand of B. Three thousands of
C. Thousands of D. Three thousand of
二.语法选择
The United States covers a large part of the North 1 continent (洲), when this land first became a nation. After 2 its freedom (自由) from England, it has 13 states. Each of the states had a star on the American flag (旗子). As the nation 3 , new states were formed and there 4 new stars on the flag. 5 a long time, there were forty-eight states. In 1959 two 6 stars were added (加) to the flag, standing for (代表) the new states of Alaska and Hawaii. 7 were the first people of the land and great unmber of people came from England. It is 8 that reason that the language of the U.S. is English and 9 its culture and customs (文化习惯) are more 10 those of England than any other country in the world.
1、A．America B．America's C．American D．Americans
2、A．win B．won C．winning D．have won
3、A．grew B．grows C．growing D．have grown
4、A．are B．were C．have been D．had been
5、A．In B．From C．For D．Through
6、A．another B．many C．other D．more
7、A．India B．Indian C．Indias D．Indians
8、A．on B．for C．because D．because of
9、A．that B．why C．many D．all
10、A．as B．like C．same D．as if
三.完形填空
All parents always want to give the best to their children. So does Jeff. Jeff has been___1__ for a long time. He wants to record his words so that his little son will be able to ___2___ his voice in the
future.
Jeff ___3___ the illness last year. The doctor told him that he might have only two to five years to ___4____ and the illness would make him lose his voice, so he decided to record ___5___ voice for his 13-month-old son, Bill.
His wife Gina said, “Jeff used to sing in a band , so his voice is __6____ to him. I can’t imagine not having his voice around . I would like Bill to know his ___7___ voice in this way.”
Jeff and his wife __8____ that he can save his real voice for their little son. He now ____9___ his weekends and evenings recording his voice. Their little son , Bill, will feel his parents’ ____10____ when he grows up.
1. A. Happy B. Fine C. Good D. Ill
2. A.watch B. Notice C. Look D. Hear
3. A. Stopped B. Saw C. Got D. Missed
4. A. Live B. Run C. Play D. Change
5. A. Her B. Their C. Your D. His
6. A. Different B. Useless C. Important D. Difficult
7. A. Mother’s B. Father’s C. Brother’s D. Sister’s
8. A. Hope B. Forget C. Hate D. Remember
9. A. Costs B. Spends C. Pays D. Takes
10. A. Love B. Problems C. Questions D. surprise
四.阅读理解
A
Do you laugh every day? Most people do. Scientists say that people laugh about 17 times a day. That is a lot of laughter.
In India, there are hundreds of laughter clubs. The people in these clubs get together every morning. First they stretch their hands above their heads. Then they pretend to laugh. Soon everyone is laughing naturally. People say they feel good after laughing together.
Scientists believe that laughter is good for you. Why? For one thing, laughter is good exercise. When you laugh, you exercise many muscles in your body. Scientists say that one hundred laughs are the same as ten minutes of running. When you laugh, you
also breathe deeply. This helps you relax. That’s good for you, too.
Why do we laugh? That is a hard question to answer. We know that people laugh more often in a group. They don’t laugh very often when they are alone. Many scientists believe that we use laughter to connect to other people. Laughter helps us feel part of a group.
In English, people say that laughter is the best medicine. Some think that laughter helps sick people get well. Do you think so, too?
1. According to scientists , people laugh about _________.
A. 17 times a week B. 17 minutes a day
C. 17 times a day D. 170 minutes a week
2. According to scientists, after having three hundred laughs, it means that_________.
A. you have enough exercise B. you will become happier
C. you’ve had 30 minutes of running D. you will become healthier
3. In India, many people _______.
A. take part in laughter clubs B. only pretend to laugh.
C. know why people laugh D. laugh more often when alone
4. Laughter is good for you because_________.
A. it can help sick people get well soon B. it is the best medicine
C. it is better than running D. it is good exercise
5. The writer wrote this passage to tell us ________.
A. laughter helps you relax B. it is good to take part in laughter clubs.
C. laughter is good for us D. people laugh every day.
6. What does the underlined word mean?
A. 心脏 B.想象 C. 肌肉 D. 神经系统
B
Many children use the Internet to get useful knowledge and information, and to relax in their free time. But some of them are not using in a good way. Here are some rules to make sure you are safe and have fun on the Internet.
Make rules for Internet use with your parents. For example, when you can go online, for how long and what activities you can go
online.
Don’t give your password (密码) to anyone else, and never leak out the following information---your real name, home address, age, school, phone number or other personal information.
Check with your parents before giving out a credit (信用) card number.
Never send a photo of yourself to someone in e-mail unless your parents say it’s OK.
Check with your parents before going into a chat room. Different chat rooms have different rules and attract different kinds of people. You and your parents must make sure it’s a right place for you.
Never agree to meet someone you met on the Internet without your parent’s permission (允许). Never meet anyone you met on line alone.
Always remember that people online may not be who they say they are. Treat everyone online as strangers.
If something you see or read online makes you uncomfortable, leave the site. Tell a parent or teacher right away.
Treat other people as you’d like to be treated. Never use bad language.
Remember—not everything you read on the Internet is true.
( )6. If you want a true friend on the Internet , you can ____________ .
A tell the people what your name is .
B meet the people on line alone.
C write an e-mail about yourself .
D get your parent’s permission.
( )7. It’s good for children to ________ on the Internet.
A. give password to others B. get useful knowledge and information
C. give out a credit card number D. go into a chat room as they’d like to
( )8. The underlined phrase “leak out” in the third paragraph may mean “________.”
A. give away B. leave out C. give out D. put away
( )9. If your parents don’t agree, never ________.
A. read anything on the Internet B. relax in your free time
C. have a face-to face meeting with anyone you met
online
D. treat other people as you’d like to be treated
( )10. This passage is mainly about “________”.
A. How to use Computers B. Surfing on the Internet
C. Information on the Internet D. Internet Safety Rules
C
Do you know why different animals or pests (昆虫) have their special colors? Colors in them seem to be used mainly to protect themselves.
Some birds like eating locusts (蝗虫), but birds cannot easily catch them. Why? It is because locusts change their colors together with the change of the colors of crops(庄稼). When crops are green, locusts look green. But as the harvest time comes, locusts change to the same brown color as crops have. Some other pests with different colors from plants are easily found and eaten by others. So they have to hide themselves for lives and appear only at night.
If you study the animal life, you’ll find the main use of coloring is to protect themselves. Bears, lions and other animals move quietly through forests. They cannot be easily seen by hunters (猎人). This is because they have the colors much like the trees.
Have you ever noticed an even stranger act? A kind of fish in the sea can send out a kind of very black liquid (液体)when it faces danger. While the liquid spreads over (散开), its enemies (敌人)cannot find it. And it immediately swims away. So it has lived up to now though it is not strong at all.
( )11.From the passage we learn that locusts________.
A. are small animals
B. are easily found by birds
C. are dangerous to their enemies
D. change their colors to protect themselves
( )12.How can pests with different colors from plants keep out of danger?
A. They run away quickly.
B. They have the colors much like their enemies.
C. They hide themselves by day and appear at
night.
D. They have to move quietly.
( )13.Bears and lions can keep safe because _________.
A. they have the colors much like the trees
B. they move quietly
C. they like brown and gray colors
D. they live in forests
( )14.Why can the kind of fish live up to now?
A. Because it is very and strong.
B. Because the liquid it sends out can help it escape from its enemies.
C. Because the liquid it sends out can kill its enemies.
D. Because it swims faster than any other fish.
( )15.Which is the best title for this passage?
A. The Change of Colors for Animals and Pests
B. Colors of Different Animals and Pests
C. The Main Use of Colors for Animals and Pests
D. Some Animals and Pests
D
In 1993 an unknown American called Clarence Nash went to see the filmmaker Walt Disney. He had an unusual voice and he wanted to work in Disney’s cartoon(动画片) film for children. When Walt Disney heard Nash’s voice, he said ”Stop! That’s our duck!”
The duck was the now-famous Donald Duck, who first appeared in 1934 in the firm The Wise Little Hen. Donald lived in an old houseboat(水上住家) and wore his sailor jacket and hat. Later that year he became a star after an eight – minute Mickey Mouse film. The cinema audience liked him because he was lazy and greedy(贪婪的), and because he lost his temper (发脾气) very quickly. And they loved his voice when he became angry with Mickey’s eight nephews(侄子). Soon Donald was more popular than Mickey Mouse himself, probably because he wasn’t a goody-goody like Mickey.
In the 1930S, ‘ 40s and ‘ 50s Donald and his friends Mickey, Goofy and Pluto made hundreds of Disney cartoons. He also made educational films about the place of the
USA in the world, and safety in the home. Then in 1966 Donald Duck and his voice disappeared – there were no more new cartoons.
Clarence Nash died in February, 1985. But today’s children can still see the old cartoons on television and hear that famous voice.
( )16. Who made Donald Duck film? ______
A. Mickey Mouse. B. Clarence Nash.
C. Walt Disney. D. Pluto.
( )17. When was the first Donald Duck film made? ______
A. In 1933. B. In 1934.
C. In 1966. D. In 1930.
( )18. Who was Clarence Nash? ______
A. A cartoonist. B. Donald Duck’s voice.
C. A film-maker. D. A film star.
( )19. Where do today’s children see Donald Duck ? ______
A. In new film. B. At the cinema.
C. On television. D. At concerts.
( )20. The underlined word ”audience” in the second paragraph means______ .
A. reads B. formal interview
C. law freedom D. the people who watch a film at a cinema
五.写作
第一节:首字母填空
1.Janet is too s____ to speak in the hall.
2.When we get older and older, we will l______ our memory slowly and slowly.
3.It's the s_____ between you and me. Don't tell others.
4.Everyone should r______ the older.
5.He is too busy, so let me go i_______.
第二节.完成句子
1.自1990年起， 我们一直住在这里。
We _______ ________ here since
1990.
2.我们每个人都正在盼望春节的到来。
We________ ________ _______ _____ the Spring Festival.
3.妈妈阻止我晚上外出。
My mother _______ me _______ _______ out at night.
4.我在阅读方面有困难
I _______ ________ ________
5.这部电影值得观看。
This film is________ ________ _________.
第三节
假如你是学校学生会成员,请根据表格内容完成一则活动的英文通知，写一篇不少于80字短文。
1.周六晚上8点将有一场音乐会在星海音乐厅；
2.晚上7点校门口集合，不要迟到；
3.厅内不允许带食物、饮料；
4.在音乐会期间，我们不应该大声讲话；
5.我们将于晚上10点回到学校。 祝你玩得愉快！
Notice
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Students’ Union
八年级上册第四单元测
（总分：100 分考试时间：60分钟）
学校：________ 姓名：________
题号
一
二
三
四
五
六
七
八
总分
得分
阅卷人
一、 语言知识与运用
第一节 单项选择（共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分）
16. The pieces of salt are ______ small ______ see.
A. so, to B. too, to C. very, to D. too for
17. _____ interesting ____ us ____________ an English opera together.
A. Its; for; play B. It’s; for; to play
C. Its; of; to play D. It’s; of; play
18. I am very ________ because tomorrow there will be an __________ trip.
A. exciting; excited B. excited; excited
C. excited; exciting D. exciting; exciting
19. — Whose house is this ?
—It is said that it belongs______ a famous singer.
A. with B. on C. to D. for
20. When I walked into the shop, I saw a man____ away with a bag.
A. run B. runs C. running D ran
21. On May 1st, ________ people traveled around the country.
A. million of B. the million C. millions of D. a million of
22. Animals are very clever, ___________, parrots can speak like human beings.
A. for example B. such as C. for the example D. and so on
23. Mr. Sun _____ go to bed early when he was young.
A. didn’t use to B. doesn’t use to C. doesn’t used to D. didn’t used to
24. China is one of ______ in the world.
A. the largest B. the larger countries C. the largest countries D. the larger country
25. The little boy is _______ in some ______ story books.
A. interesting, interesting B. interesting, interested
C. interested, interested D. interested,
interesting
第二节 语法选择 (共10小题, 每小题1分，满分10分)
Allan was worried. This was his first time to go traveling 26_ air. He didn’t know how to find his seat, _ 27__ he went to the air hostess (空姐) and asked, “ Could you help me? I can’t find my seat.” The air hostess showed __28__ the seat and told him __28 __ and fasten(系紧) the seat belt. She told Allen not to move about when the plane was going up. And she also said that Allen’s ears might feel __ 29 __ strange, but he didn’t need to __30__ about it because many people felt __ 31__ that. When the plane was flying very high, Allan could stand up and walk around. He could __34__ read books, newspapers and see films. The air hostess would __33 __ food and drinks. Allan would enjoy the flight and __35___ soon.
26. A. by B. with C. on D. in
27. A. yet B. or C. but D. so
28. A. his B. he C. her D. him
29. A. sit down B. sitting down C. to sit down D. sits down
30. A. a bit B. a lot C. a bit of D. a few
31. A. worrying B. be worried C. worry D. worried
32. A. in B. like C. as D. for
33. A. neither B. either C. too D. also
34. A. hold B. took C. bring D. carry
35. A. arrive home B arrive at home C. get to home D. reach at home
二、完型填空（共10小题，每小题1分，满分10分）
先通读下面短文，掌握大意，然后从每题的四个选项中选择可以填入相应空白处的最佳答案。
“ What ’s the matter, mum?”
As soon as I enter the door, I find that my mother is unhappy. But she usually (36) the door and welcomes me with a smile!
“She ’ s dying, ” mum says sadly. I (37) what she says. The tulip is dying.
A month ago, we moved (38) our new house and mum bought a very beautiful tulip. Mum liked it very much. (39) she was free, she would sit beside the tulip and enjoys its beautiful colour (40) its good
smell.
She treated it like a baby and looked after it (41) . She put the tulip by the window and moved it from one place to (42) to give the tulip enough sunshine. The first thing she did when she (43) every morning was to water the tulip. Mum also fertilized it many times.
She hoped that with great care, the tulip would become more and more beautiful and ___(44)___. But the tulip was dying because of too much sunshine, water and fertilizer.
It’s true that mother loved the tulip. But this kind of love (45) be harmful. Love can sometimes kill what you love.
36. A closes B. opens C. keeps D. takes
37. A .know B. love C. think D. find
38. A .into B. around C. across D. with
39. A . Before B. Because C. After D. When
40. A . but B. and C. for D. or
41. A .happily B. brightly C. carefully D. usually
42. A .other B. place C. two places D. another
43. A .got up B. made the bed
C. played the piano D. washed her face
44. A .drier B. stronger C. wetter D. older
45. A .must B. should C. can D. need
三、阅读理解（共20小题，每小题2分，满分40分）
(A)
Many places in the world need more fresh water(淡水). Every country is trying to find ways to turn salt water into fresh.
Why aren't there many factories like the Symi factory?
In some places, the sun isn't hot enough, or it doesn't shine every day. In these places other ways to heating(加热) sea water can be used. These ways cost more money, but they work faster than the sun. By boiling(煮沸) sea water with high heat，a lot of fresh water can be made quickly. But heating is not the only way to get fresh
water from salt water. Other ways are tried. One way is freezing(冷冻). The fresh part of salt water freezes first. To get fresh water, the pieces of ice are taken out.
Which way is best? The one that gives the most water for the least money. It may be a different way for each place.
Symi's way seems very good for small, hot places. It doesn't make very much water at a time. But the factory is easy to build and cost little.
That's why people in many dry places talk about Symi!
46. From the passage we know that fresh water .
A. is needed in many countries
B. is needed in every country
C. can be used in many ways
D. is very important for factories
47. The Symi factory .
A. is a fresh water factory
B. can be built everywhere
C. can make much fresh water at a time
D.doesn't need sunshine every day
48. Which is the best way for small and hot places to get fresh water?
A. Boiling or heating the sea water.
B. The way in sunny places.
C. The Symi's way.
D. Freezing the sea water in cold places.
49. The writer is mainly talking about .
A. water making factories in different countries
B. the ways of making fresh water from sea water
C. hot places and dry places
D. how to make good use of the sunlight
50. Which of the following isn't true?
A. New ways are tried to get fresh water.
B. A lot of fresh water can be made quickly by
heating.
C. The best way is to get the most fresh water with the least money.
D. The Symi's way doesn't work in dry places.
(B)
Films in West-city Cinema this week
A WORLD WITHOUT THIEVES
• Chinese film (2004)
• Dircected (导演) by Feng Xiaogang
• Mainly acted by Liu Dehua, Liu Ruoying,
Ge You, Li Bingbing
• From Monday to Wednesday, at 8 : 00 p. m.
• Ticket Price: RMB¥35 KUNGFU HUSTLE
• Chinese Hong Kong film (2004)
• Directed by Zhou Xingchi
• Mainly acted by Zhou Xingchi, Yuan Hua, Liang Xiaolong
• From Wednesday to Friday, at 8 : 00 p. m.
• Ticket price: RMB¥40
HARRY POTTER (III)
• American film (2004)
• Directed by Alfonso Cuaron
• Mainly acted by Daniel Radcliffe, Rupert Grint. Emma Waston
• From Friday to Sunday, at 7 : 30 p. m.
•Ticket Price: RMB¥30 (Half on Sun¬day for children) TROY
• American film (2004)
• Directed by Wolfgang Petersen
• Mainly acted by Julian Glover, Brian Cox,
Nathan Jones, Adoni Maropis
• From Tuesday to Thursday, at 8 : 00 p. m.
• Ticket Price: RMB¥45
51. You can see________ foreign films in West-city Cinema this week.
A. one B. two C. three D.
four
52. If you want to see the film which was directed by Feng Xiaogang, go to the
cinema on________.
A. Monday B. Thursday C. Friday D. Saturday
53. Children can pay only _____ when they want to see a film on Sunday.
A. ¥5 B. ¥10 C. ¥15 D. ¥20
54. You can see the film ________ on Saturday.
A. Troy B. Harry Potter C. A World without Thieves D. Kungfu Hustle
55. Which of the following is TRUE?
A. Liu Dehua acted in the film Kungfu Hustle.
B. The ticket price of the four films is the same.
C. All the films start after 8 o'clock in the evening.
D. The four films were released (发行) in the same year.
(C)
Most people have flown a kite or have seen one ride and dip(下降) in strong spring wind. Not so many people know that kites were first made in China thousands of years ago. The ancient Chinese were making and flying kites even before they were writing.
A long time ago, the Chinese made kites to use in wars. They would fly these war kites in the dark. The kites were fixed so that they made strange sounds. Men who were at war with them would hear these sounds and run away. They thought those strange sounds were made by gods in the sky.
The ancient Chinese also flew kites to bring good luck and to make their crops(农作物) grow well. Sometimes they tied long strings and hooks(钩) to their kites. Then they would fly the kites over water, letting the hooks hang down to catch fish.
The Chinese use sticks, strings(线) and paper to make their kites. Some of these kites look like animals or trees and some look like birds.
56. Which of the following is NOT true?
A. Kites were first made in China.
B. Kites were flown for good luck.
C. The ancient Chinese couldn’t
write.
D. Kites can have many different shapes (形状).
57. In ancient China, kites could be used for _________.
A. catching fish B. helping people
C. watering the crops D. helping people walk in the dark
58. The ancient Chinese used kites in wars because the kites _________.
A. could bring good luck B. looked like animals
C. could help them win a war D. could fly high
59. The Chinese usually use _________ to make their kites.
A. sticks, strings and grass B. strings, hair and wood
C. paper, strings and sticks D. paper, ropes and hooks
60. What is the best title of this passage?
A. Lucky Kites. B. Strange Kites.
C. Beautiful Kites. D. Chinese Kites.
(D)
The undersea world is very beautiful. Now more and more people want to dive in the water to find the secret there. Scuba diving is a new sport today. It can take you into a wonderful undersea world.
You will find many strange animals in the sea. Some are as large out light in the dark and some have sharp teeth.
During the day, there is enough light. Here, under the sea, everything is blue and green.
When fish swim nearby, you can catch them with your hands. When you have bottles of air on your back, you can stay in deep water for a long time. However, you can’t dive too deep. And you must be very careful when you dive in deep water.
The deep sea is not an easy place to live in. It’s cold, and it’s dark, too. The deeper it is, the less sunlight there is. At about 3,000 feet, there is no light at all. It is very dark in the sea. Many fishes have no eyes. Some have big eyes. A few have eyes on one side.
Besides(除了) the cold and the darkness, deep-sea animals face a third danger—other
animals.
Animals eat! They must find food to eat. Many animals eat plants. However, some animals eat meat. This means these sea animals have two big jobs. They need to find animals as food, and they have to try not to become other animals’ meal.
61. Why do people want to dive in the sea? Because .
A. they want to catch fish
B. they want to find the secrets of the undersea world.
C. the sea is deep.
D. there are all kinds of plants in the sea.
62. In the daytime, when you dive in the sea, you .
A. can see everything green and blue B. can’t be in danger.
C. can catch nothing D. can’t see anything clearly.
63. How many dangers will animals meet in the deep sea?
A. One B. Two C. Three D. Four
64. When you do scuba diving, you can _____.
A. stay in deep water for a long time
B. dive very, very deep
C. live in deep water easily
D. dive freely without any dangers
65. Which of the following is WRONG?
A. One animal finds something to eat, and it may be eaten by others
B. At the depth of 3,000 feet under the sea, many animals can find their way by hearing and feeling
C. The deeper the sea is, the darker and colder it is
D. At the depth of 3,000 feet under the sea, all animals can find their way by seeing.
四、写作（共三节，满分40分）
第一节 单词拼写 根据所给的首字母填单词 (共5小题, 每小题1分，满分5分)
66. Tomorrow we are going to have a picnic, so the w______ class are very happy.
67. David will not come back u_______ he gets his PSP back from his cousin.
68. Martin often gives me some a________ on my studies and it helps me a lot.
69. There are a lot of clothes shops on both s_________ of the
road.
70. Deaf people c____________________ with others by sign language(手语).
第二节 完成句子 根据汉语完成句子 (共5小题, 每小题2分，满分10分)
71.过去我经常在周末去爬白云山。
I _______ ________ climb Baiyun Hills ______ _________ __________.
72. 在我看来，树木是抵抗污染的战斗者。
____________ ___________ ______________, trees are pollution fighters.
73. 如果你不能去，他愿意替你去。
If you can’t go, he’ll go __________ _________you.
74. 上百万人来中国参加奥运会。
________ ________ people came to China to enjoy the 2008 Olympic Games.
75. 我的电脑和你的是一样的贵。
My computer is ______ _____________ _______ yours.
第三节 书面表达（共1题, 15分）
6月4日你们班举行了一次班会。请根据提示内容，写一篇短文描述这次会议。要求80字左右，可适当发挥。
提示：会议主题：参加自愿者活动（volunteer work）
会议时间：2010年6月4日上午
会议地点：教室
参加人员：班长（主持班会），全班学生参加
会议内容：1. 决定去老人之家（nursing home）照顾老人。
2. 决定了集合的地点,携带物品及要乘坐的交通工具。
参考词汇:hold, monitor, discuss, take charge of, in the end, look after, make a decision
about
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
八年级上册第五单元测
（总分：100 分考试时间：60分钟）
学校：________ 姓名：________
题号
一
二
三
四
五
六
七
八
总分
得分
阅卷人
一、单项选择
1. I'm free every day today.
A. in B. on C. Except D. besides
2. The room is everything.
A. full with B. fill of C. fill with D. filled with
3. Her jacket her １００ yuan .
A. pays B. spends C. buys D. costs
4.-Would you please take part in my birthday party? . '.
A. Thank you very much Ｃ. Thanks for telling me
C.Yes, I＇ll go ' D.I'll be glad to
5. During winter vacation, I sleeping late.
A. used to B. was used for
C. was used to D. use to
6. It's time for class. We'd better go to our classroom as _ as we can.
A.slowly B.quickly C.quietly D.easily
7. (2013 .江西模拟)
-lt looks like a television. Do you think so?
-Yes, I .
A. understand B. know
C. mean D. agree
8. Drinking and smoking are your health.
A. good for B. bad for
C. good to D. bad to
9. The expressions you use might depend whom you are speaking to. '
A. to B. on C. at D. with
10. Tom succeeded passing the final exam.
A. in B. to C. on D. at
二、完形填空（１５分）
A few minutes before six o'clock, Mr Smith began to leave. He was about to start the car when a gunman(持枪者) １ up from the back seat. He 2 a gun to Mr Smith's head,"Drive me to Paris! " he shouted.
“All right,"Mr Smith answered. He started the engine(发动机), pulled away from the side of the street and 3 down. Being 81 years old, he knew he could not 4 the gunman. He knew he needed help. Where were the police? As he drove
5 each crossing, he looked up and down the side streets, hoping to meet a police car. But he could see 6 ."Just my luck," he thought. "If I was 7 too fast, there would be a police car on every corner. "
8_ he pushed his foot down on the accelerator, and the car ran _9 faster. "What are
you doing?" shouted the gunman. "Keeping off the police," Mr Smith answered. "I thought I saw apolice car .10 there.
He ran red Iights, droye wrong on one-way streets. On the two-way streets, he drove on the
wrong 11 0f the road. Not one of the policemen saw him. Again Mr Smith's plan was not working. He had to try a 12 plan.
He 3 a corner and saw the police station in front. Then he drove his car as fast as he could towards the police gate. The car hit a police motorbike down and stopped. Mr Smith shouted, "Help! Help" Then he l4 back to, grab the man's gun. At the same time the policemen heard the 15 and quickly caught the gunman.
1.A.woke B.sat C.stood D.jumped
2. A. brought B. pointed C. held D. carried
3.A.drove B.left C.took D.pushed
4.A.fight B.lift .C.keep D.hit
5. A. around B. over C. through D. towards
6. A. somebody B. anybody
C.everybody D.nobody .
7.A.driving B.moving C.getting D.walking
8.A. Slowly B. Suddenly C. Quietly D. Carefully
9.A.more B.much C.very D.quite
10. A. front B. near C. below D. back
11. A. street B. way C. side D. corner
12.A. new B.safe C.hard D.nice
13. A. found B. Turne C. stopped at D. arrived at
14.A. got B. looked C. turned D. came
15.A. sound B. man C. voice D. Noise
三、阅读理解（50分）
A
Once there was a rich man who lived with his wife and child. He loved the child so much that he sent him to Oxford for two or three years. At the end of the first year at the university, this young student came home. He wanted a change. And he also wanted to tell his parents about Oxford.
It happened one night that the father, the mother and the young student were sitting at supper.
They had in front of them only two chickens. Just as they were about to begin eating, the father said, "My boy, I have spent a lot of money on you to send you to Oxford. Now I want to know what you have learned." The son smiled and said, "Father, I have studied a science which can prove that these two chickens on the plate are really three chickens." "Well," said the father, "This is something I would like very much to know. " "There are two chickens on the plate," said the student. He took one of the chickens in his hand and said, "Here is one more; and one and two makes three. So here are three chickens. " Then the father took one of the chickens to himself, gave the other to his wife, and said, "I will have one of the chickens myself, your mother shall have another, . an d you can have the third for your supper and nothing else. " The father kept his
word and so the student went without his supper.
1. The rich man loved his son very much, so he
A. sent him to Oxford to study
B. wanted him to live at Oxford for two or three years
C. sent him to work at Oxford for two or three years
D. gave him a lot of money
2. The father asked his son _ .
A. how much money he had spent at the university
B. how he liked Oxford
C. what he had learned by the end of the first year at the university
D. how his son got along with his classmates
3. The student said that
A. he could make three chickens
B. he could prove the two chickens on the plate were really three
C. he could change the two chickens on the plate into three
D. he was good at math
4. Who was cleverer, the father or the son?
A. Neither. B. Both.
C. The son. D. The father.
5. In the end _ _
A. the student had nothing to eat for his supper
B. each of them had a chicken for their supper
C. the father gave his son the third chicken to eat
D. both of the parents had no chickens to eat
B
For most people, the summer holiday means sun, sea and sands, but not for Canadian schoolgirl Sarah Landry. She had a holiday full of ice and snow. She and her family traveled across Greenland!They used dogsleds(豹拉雪橇) and kites to cross the world's largest island. Sarah said there wasn't much to see during the long journey. "There is only snow, ice, and more snow. " The family traveled 15 miles a day for 22 days, sometimes faster when strong winds
pushed along their kites.
They lived in tents, ate dried food, and took baths with heated water. When they weren't
traveling, 'they played with kites and made snowmen. The family had a laptop (手提电脑) and they could send 'and get e-mails even on Greenland's ice cap! The road to the top was icy and dangerous.
The difficult journey was worth it when they reached the ice cap (冰盖) and saw the view.
"Icebergs were as bright as the rising sun." Now Sarah and her family have returned home, and
they're talking about their next plan. Next holiday, they are going to the South Pole.
1. Where did they live when they traveled?
A. In their car. B In a ship.
C. In tents. D. In a house.
2. How did they cross the world's largest island?
A. By dogsled. B. By car.
C. On foot. D. By ship.
3. How far did they travel?
A. 22 miles. B. 15 miles.
C. 22 km. D. 330 miles.
4. They saw few things there except _ ？
A. the sun B. snow C. ice D. trees
5. Where are they going for the next holiday?
A. Beijing.
B. the South Pole.
C. Africa.
D. Europe.
C
Tibet is among the most popular destinations for Chinese tourists. The number of travelers to Tibet has grown by l0% every year for a few years. Since July l,2006, when the first train ran 1956 kilometer from Xining to Lhasa, more and more people have
been going to Tibet.
The train stops at several famous places along the way, such as Qinghai Lake, Kunlun Mountain, and the Potala Palace. Passengers can also enjoy many activities during the journey, like Tibetan dancing and karaoke.
On the train, passengers can have tea, eggs and noodles for breakfast, and fried chicken and green vegetables for lunch and dinner. Unlike most Chinese trains which have open-hole toilets, this one has special toilets which can collect the waste. There is also a special rubbish system(系统) in the train that keeps the environment clean. All the windows on the train can protect people from the bright sunlight. TV and electrical sockets (插座) for computers and mobile phones can be found on the train.
Because there isn't much oxygen there, trains will have oxygen masks(氧气罩) for those who need them. It makes passengers feel more comfortable when they have enough oxygen on the famous "roof of the world". There are also doctors on the train to make sure that all of the travelers are safe. -
1. Which of the following is not among the places of
interest?
A. Qinghai Lake. B. The potala Palace.
C. Kunlun Mountain. D. Karaoke.
2. The train has a special system.
A. windows B. toilets
C. sockets D. rubbish
3. The underlined word "them" in the last paragraph
refers to _'
A. oxygen masks B. toilets
C. sockets ' D. rubbish
4. We can learn from the passage that .
A. flying to Tibet is impossible
B. the train to Lhasa is too clean to take
C. the train trip to Tibet is popular with travelers
D. taking trains to Lhasa causes a lot of trouble
5. What's the best title of the passage?
A. Magic Train to Magic Tibet
B. Tibet-Roof of the World
C. Beautiful Views in Tibet
D. A Comfortable Trip to Tibet
D
Living in a foreign culture can be exciting, but it can also be confusing (今人迷惑的). A group of Americans who taught English in other .countries recently discussed their experiences. They decided that miscommunication was always possible, even over something as simple as "yes" and "no".
On her first day in Micronesia, an island in the Pacific, Lisa thought people weren't paying any attention to her. The day was hot. She went into a store and asked, "Do you have cold drinks?" The woman there didn't say anything. Lisa repeated the question. Still the woman said nothing. She later learned that the woman had answered her: She had raised her eyebrows (届毛), which in Micronesia means " yes" .
Jane remembered an experience she had in Bulgaria, a country in Europe. She went to a restaurant that was known for its cabbage. She asked the waiter, "Do you have cabbage today?" He nodded his head. Jane waited, but the cabbage never came. In that country, a nod means "no".
Tom had a similar problem when he arrived in India. After explaining something in class, he asked his students if they understood. They answered with many different nods and shakes of the head. He thought some people had not understood, so he ex:plained again. When he asked again, they did the same thing. He soon found out that his students did understand. In India, people nod and shake their heads in different ways depending on where they come from. You have to know where a person is from to understand whether they mean "yes" or "no".
1. These Americans teaching English in other
Countries found that they________.
A. should go abroad for vacations B. needed to learn foreign languages
C. should often discuss their experiences D. had problems with communications
2. People in Micronesia show “yes” by ________.
A. nodding heads B. raising eyebrows C. shaking heads D. saying “no”
3. Tom misunderstood his class at first because________.
A. he did not know much about Indian culture
B. he didn’t explain everything clearly enough
C. some students didn’t understand his questions
D. he didn’t know where the students came from
4. Which of the following is TRUE according to(根据)this passage?
A. In Bulgaria , nodding heads means “No” B. Jane taught English on a Pacific island
C. Lisa was trying to buy some cabbage D. In India, only shaking heads means”yes”
5. The passage is mainly about ________.
A. body language in foreign restaurants B. class discussion in Indian cultures
C. miscommunication in different cultures D. English teaching in other countries
E
Whenever the sun dropped and the blue sky came up, my father and I used to climb the mountain near my house. Walking together ,my father and I used to have a lot of conversations through which I learned lessons from his experiences. He always told me, “ you should have goals like climbing the mountain,” Without the mountain-climbing that we both enjoyed, we couldn’t have enough time to spend together because my father was very busy, I really got a lot from the mountain-climbing. It gave me time to talk with my father and to be in deep thought as well as develop my patience.
Once we climbed a very high mountain. It was so challenging for me because I was only ten years old. During the first few hours of climbing, I enjoyed the flowers, trees and the birds’ singing. But as time passed, I got a pain in both of my legs. I wanted to quit climbing, but my father said to me, “You can always see a beautiful sky at the top of the mountain, but you can’t see it before you reach the top. Only there can you see all of the nice things, which if just like your life.”
At that time, I was too young to understand his words.But later after that, I got to know the meaning of hope in life, I found myself standing at the top of the mountain, and the sky was as clear as crystal.
1. The passage tells us that mountain-climbing was ________ for the father and the son.
A. hard B. enjoyable C. painful D. comfortable
2. The underlined word “crystal” in the passage means “________”
A. 岩石 B. 火焰 C. 水晶 D.寒冰
3. Which of the following is the closest in meaning to the father’s words in the second paragraph?
A. you will get all you need at the top of the mountain
B. The sky is always as clear as crystal
C. You can find life is full of nice things
D. Never give up half-way
4. We can infer (推断) from the last paragraph that ________.
A. the writer was very successful in his life B. the writer reached the top of the mountain
C. though the writer was young, he could understand his father
D. the writer used to stop half—way when he climbed the mountain
5. The best title for the passage is ________
A. Reaching the Top of the mountain B. Standing at the Top of the Mountain
C. Conversations between Father and Son D. How to Get to the Top of the Mountain
四、写作
I根据句意及首字母提示完成句子。
1. Einstein was s___________ in physics.
2. You have been t___________. That man is a thief. He has stolen your money when you are talking with him.
3. It’s hard to u___________ him when he speaks English.
4. I don’t u___________ what you mean.
1. English is d___________ from Chinese.
2.完成句子
1. 我们不明白你刚才说的话。
We don’t understand what you said ___________ ___________.
2. 他起得太晚了，结果没有赶上早班车。
He got up ___________ ___________ ___________ he didn’t catch up the early bus.
3. 请把这个空杯子拿走，给我拿杯茶来。
Please ___________ the empty cup ___________ and bring me a cup of tea.
4. 请允许我把我的朋友约翰介绍给你。
Please allow me to ___________ ___________ you my friend John.
5. 我得去买点东西。
I’ve got ___________ ___________ ___________ shopping to do.
3.书面表达：
假设你是李明，你的英国笔友Jack准备来中国广州做交流生，向你征询意见和建议。
请根据以下提示给他回封信。
【写作提示】
1. 主要人称：第三人称
2. 主要时态：一般现在时
3. 可用素材：
（1）词汇： modem, south, warm, clpthes, be famous for, delicious, miss, go shopping, store, traffic, store, traffic, underground, friendly
(2 ) 句式 It is warm all year here,so...
Guangzhou is famous for...
It’s very easy to go shopping here because...
Dear Jack,
You say you are coming to Guangzhou soon. How excited I aml Let me tell you
something about my home town - Guangzhou.
Best wishes ,
Li Ming
八年级上册第六单元测
（总分：100 分考试时间：60分钟）
学校：________ 姓名：________
题号
一
二
三
四
五
六
七
八
总分
得分
阅卷人
一、单项选择
1.in the past ten years, great changes________ place in my hometown.
A.took B.takes C.have been D. Will taken
2.He has been at our school________.
A.For two years ago B for two years
C.since two years D.two years ago
3.________have you been away from here?
----for about ten years
A.how soon B.how long C. How far D. How often
4.this composition is good _____ a few mistakes.
A.except B. Except for C.besides D.but
5.Wang qing succeeded _______ a job in the famous company.
A.To get B. to getting C.in getting D. Get
6.hello,May I speak to Kate?
Sorry, she isn’t here now. She ______to Shanghai.
A.went B.has been C.has gone
7.He has never visit Shenzhen,________?
A.has he B.hasn’t he C.does he D.doesn’t he
8.he is a funny boy,he often makes us_______.
A.Laugh B. to laugh C.laughing D.to laughing
9.the teacher asked the students _________in class.
A.not make noise B.not making noise
C.not to make noise D.don’t make noise.
10.Have you packed your beach towel_______?
Yes , I have_______packed it.
A.Already , already B.yet , yet
C.already ,yet D. Yet ,already
二、完形填空
We are lucky to have many things. However, most of us usually waste them.
Electricity is one thing that we ___1__ most. Lights, TVs,___2__and other things are often kept on even when no one is using them. We should turn them off.when we do not need them. It ___3___less than a second to do it.anyhow,not wasting electricity can save money because we do not have to ___4____the electricity we do not use.
The second thing that we often waste is water. Fresh water is valuable.____5____it shouldn’t be wasted. It is only a simple matter of turning off a tap. I am sure that____6___can do this easily if he wants to do.
Another big waste is food.my mother ____7___cook too much food and much of it was thrown away.i told her we had wasted so much ___8___.she thought i was right and now she cooks only what we can eat.
It is not right to be wasteful. I find there is a simple___9__of not wasting things. That’s to use only what we ___10__. Do not touch what we do not need. In this way we can stop being wasteful.
1. A. Produce B.waste C.use D.save
2. A.computers B.watches C.phones D.cookers
3. A.brings B. Gives C.keeps D.takes
1. A.afford B.save C.pay for D.care for
2. A though B.because C.so D.but
3. A.nobody B.something C.everything D. Nothing
4. A.planned to B.used to C.was able to D. Was afraid to
5. A.electricity B.water C.food D.money
6. A.way B.thing C.plan D.project
7. A.buy B.get C.bring D.need
三、阅读理解
A
Some people belive that dreams can tell them what will happen in the future. Nobody knows why,but there are many stories about people who have had dreams that came true. One of these people was a man called John chapman. Who lived in a small place,named swaffham in england and was deeply loved by people in this town.though he was very poor , he was kind and liked to help others in trouble. One night, he dreamed that he was standing on London bridge. There are plenty of people on the bridge but they were not interested in him. They were all unware of him. Three days later, he decided to go home, but before he could do this a shopkeeper was approaching him.
I’ve been watching you .the shopkeeper said. Are you waiting for someone ?
Yes,said John. I had a dream about a man on London bridge.He was going to lead me to own a lot of money.
Oh, said the shopkeeper. You shouldn’t belive in dreams. If I believed in dreams ,I’d be in swaffham right now. I had a dream a few days ago about a man from Swaffham. His name was John chapman and he had gold in his garden near an old apple tree.
Jhon was amazed and immediately headed for home.as soon as he arrived,he dug in his garden near the old apple tree.
1. Swaffham is probably the name of _______
A. A city B. A bridge C. A tomn D. A church
2. John chapman went to London because_______
A. He visit a friend there
A. He wanted to meet a shopkeeper
B. He wanted to be famous.
C. He wanted to make his dream come true.
3. the underline phrase “head for”means_______
A. left B.passed C.went D.hid
4. according to the story , john was away from his town for at least______days
A. Three B. Four C. Five D. Six
5. what happened to John chapman probably at the end of the story?
A. he found nothing and remained very poor
B. He found gold and gave some to others in need
C. He found gold and kept it on his own.
D. He found nothing and gave his dream up
B
Students who say they never or hardly ever use dictionaries often speak English well,but usually write poorly because they make many mistakes.
The students who use dictionaries most do not learn quite well either. The ones who look up every new word do not read fast.for this reason,they do not have time to read much.those who use small two-language dictionaries have the worst problems. Their dictionaries often give only one or two words as translations of English. But one english word often has many translations in a foreign language and one foreign word has many translation in English.
The most successful students are those who use large college edition dictionaries with about 100,000words but do not use them too often.when they are reading, these students first try to get the general idea and understand new words from the context(语境)then they read agin and use the dictionaries to look up only key words that they still do not understand. They use dictionaries more for writing. If they are not sure how to spell a word,or divide it into syllables(音节)，they always use a dictionary.Also, if they think a noun might have an unusual plural form,they check these in a dictionary.
1. Why are students who never used dictionaries poor in writing?
A. Because they don’t know how to use right words
B. Because they are not sure how to spell words.
C. Because they make a large number of mistakes.
D. Because they can’t understand the main idea.
2. the underline word “they” refers to _______
A. The students who only look up key words
B. The students who look up every new word
C. The students who never use dictionaries
D. The students who use large edition dictionaries
3. Who are probably the most successful English learners?
A. Those who use dictionaries most
B. Those who use small two-language dictionaries.
C. Those who sometimes use large college edition dictionaries.
D .Those who never or hardly ever use dictionaries.
4. When does the writer advise students to use a good dictionary?
A. At the beginning of the reading.
B. At the end of the reading,
C. During the first reading,
D. After the first reading.
5. What is the best title of the passage?
A. How to Make Good Use of a Dictionary
B. Why to Use a Dictionary
C. How to Improve Spoken English
D. How to Practise Reading Fast
C
F. Scott Fitzgerald, born on September 24. 1896, an American novelist, was once a student of St. Paul Academy, the Newman School and attended Princeton University for a short time. In 1917 he joined the army and was sent to Alabama, where he met his wife Zelda Sayre. Then he had to earn some money so that he could become rich and marry her.
His life with her was full of great happiness, and he wrote it in his diary—“My own happiness in the past often got such joy that I couldn't share it even with my dearest person, but had to walk it away in quiet streets and take down parts of it in my diary. ”
This Side of Paradise, his first novel, was published in 1920. Encouraged by its success, Fitzgerald began to spend more time on his writing. Then he continued with the novel The Beautiful and Damned (1922), a collection of short stories Tales of the Jazz Age (1922), and a play The Vegetable (1923). But his greatest success was the novel The Great Gatsby (1925), which made him famous in the literary world. Yet it failed to make him rich enough. Then, in 1926, he published another collection of short stories All the Sad Young Men.
However, Fitzgerald’s problems with his wife Zelda had an influence on his writing. During the 1920s he tried to reorder (重新调整) his life, but failed. By 1930，his wife fell seriously ill and had to go to a Swiss clinic. During this period he completed novels Tender Is the Night in 1934 and The Love of the last Tycoon in 1940. While his wife was in hospital in the United States, he got totally addicted to (沉溺于) drinking. Sheila Graham, his dear
friend, helped him get out of such a bad habit.
1. When Fitzgerald was in his twenties, he was
A. poor B. famous
C. smart D. well educated
2. Why did Fitzgerald begin to spend more time on his writing?
A. Because he wanted to make a lot of money.
B. Because of the success of his first novel.
C. Because he wanted to share his happy life with others.
D. Because of the encouragement of his family.
3. Which of the following is NOT true?
A. He failed to reorder his life during the 1920s though he tried.
B. His wife fell seriously ill and was sent to hospital by 1930.
C. He depended a lot on drinking while his wife was in hospital in America.
D. He didn’t keep himself away from drinking even with the help of his friend.
4. What probably is the main idea of this passage?
A. Fitzgerald’s life with Zelda.
B. Zelda’s illness and the ways to treat her.
C. Fitzgerald’s friendship with Graham.
D. Fitzgerald's life and his literary contributions.
5. According to the passage, how many novels did Fitzgerald write?
A.5. B.6. C.7. D.8.
D
NO.1
• Nanjing Xia Fei Hotel for Waiters and Waitresses, ¥3,000 per month
• Requirements:
1. Male or Female, at least high school education, 18—22 years old.
2. Height: male 1.70 tn-1.75 m, female 1.65 m-1.70 m
Weight: male 55 kg—65 kg; female 50 kg—55 kg
Nice appearance
3. Being good at communication, a little spoken English.
Time of enrollment: April 15—April 20, 2013.
Place of enrollment: Room 4001 Building 5 Xia Fei Hotel.
Or E-mail to: njxiafei@sina.com
Please carry your ID, schooling record certificates, the originals and copies both wanted,
with two pieces of color photo (2"size).
•Tel: 025-3052411, Miss Liu
NO.2
• Beijing International Traveling Center for Bellboys, Salary ¥5,000 per month.
• Requirements:
1. Male, graduated from a university, 20—25 years old.
2. Height: 1.70 m-1.80 m, Weight: 60 kg-70 kg.
3. Excellent spoken English.
Time of enrollment: May 15—May 25, 2013.
Place of enrollment: B5 Room 1004 Beijing
International Traveling Center.
Please show your ID, schooling record certificates, the originals and copies both wanted, with two pieces of colour photo (2"size).
•Hotline: 010-68743211, Miss Tang
1. Li Hai is 24. He can speak English well. He is 1.74 m and 63 kg. He may find a job in_____.
A. the Traveling Center B. Xia Fei Hotel
C. both A and B D. neither A nor B
2. You can both telephone and E-mail to________.
A. the Traveling Center B. Xia Fei Hotel
C. both A and B D. neither A nor B
3. What is the same between the two advertisements?
A. Time of enrollment.
B. Place of enrollment.
C. What you need to show.
D. Salary for per month.
4. Which of the following is true according to the advertisements?
A. Miss Tang works in Nanjing Xia Fei Hotel.
B. You can send an E-mail to Beijing International Traveling Center.
C. Sally is beautiful and can get the job in Beijing International Traveling center.
D. More money is given to a bellboy than to a waiter or a waitress.
5. Where can you probably see these ads?
A. In a newspaper. B. In a textbook.
C. In a storybook. D. In a magazine.
四、写作：
1.根据句意和所给单词的首字母补全单词。
1. The soldier r_________down the stairs and said, “Captain, they have gone.”
2. “We have won!” all the citizens of Troy c__________.
3. In one night, they s___________in capturing the city with a trick.
4. When his mother came in his room, that boy p____________to be asleep.
5. China is in Asia and England is in E_______________.
6. He is a soldier. He has been in the a_______________ for about two years.
7. The general o__________his soldiers to fire.
8. They often made jokes about the s___________Greeks.
2.用所给词的适当形式填空。
1. —_you____________(buy) a newspaper yet?
—Yes, I have. I____________(buy) it two hours ago.
2. —Where is Mr. Green, do you know?
—He____________(go) to England, and he____________(return) in two weeks.
3. —Who made you___________(laugh) in class?
—I was made____________(laugh) by his jokes.
4. He got the best job___________(success). In other words, he_________(success) in getting it.
5. —Is Zhang Ying____________(tall) girl in your class?
—Yes, she is____________(tall) than any other girl in our class.
3.书面表达
假如你是一名导游,负责陪同外宾游览苏州，车子开到虎丘山(The Tiger Hill）门口时，你在车子上用英语向他们讲几点说明，内容如下,开头语已写好。
1.在虎丘山逗留3小时，11点开车,请记住车号，
2.下车时带好贵审物品（valuable things),不要忘记
3.要求大家跟你一起参观。
4. 祝大家玩得愉快。
Ladies and gentlemen, we are now at the gate of the Tiger
Hill._______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
八年级上册第七单元测
（总分：100 分考试时间：60分钟）
学校：________ 姓名：________
题号
一
二
三
四
五
六
七
八
总分
得分
阅卷人
一、单项选择
1. Our team _________ the final football match by the score two to one last week.
A. won B, hit C. win D. lose
2. Their football team beat out team. We _______ the match.
A. won B. losed C. lost D. hit
3. Remember ________ off the lights when you leave the classroom.
A. turn B. to turn C. turning
4. Don’t forget ________ the young tree every day.
A. to water B. watered C, water D. watering
5. They’re having _______ trouble with the new baby.
A. a lot of B, a lot C. many D. a few
6. There are many rare animals. _________, the panda is one of them.
A. For example B. Such as C. As well D. As well as
7. We can easily become unhappy _______ we work out our problems in our daily life.
A. after B, if C. until D. unless.
8. If the weather is sunny tomorrow, the travel _______ sightseeing, shopping, and surfing in the sea.
A. includes B. is including C. included D. will include
9. Mr. Lee was ill. So Mr. Zhao attended the meeting_________.
A. instead B, instead of C, however D. after all
10. Nobody _______ to go there with you.
A. want B. wants C. is wanting D. don’t want
二、完型填空
Dear editor，
Once I went to the post office to buy some magazines．When I was ready to leave，someone came near to me．I ____1____ and saw him old and thin, ____2____ a dirty coat on. I could see easily that he was a migrant worker（农民工）. Instinctively（本能地），I stepped backward.
He said he wanted to send some money home but he didn't know ____3___fill out the form．He asked me for help．“But you can ask the cashier on duty,” I said casually（随意地）．
“I have asked her．But I still can't follow her instructions．W0uld you please help me?” ___4___，my mobile phone rang．It was ____5____ to refuse him．Hopelessly and sadly, he gave up begging me and tried ____6_____someone else to help him．
As I stepped out, I ___7____ nervous about it．How could I refuse someone who was in need of help，especially such an old migrant worker? Was it _____8_____ he was poor and dirty?
I want to ___9____ him in this newspaper．It's been on my mind for a long time．And I hope ____10____better by doing this．
Yours，
Lu Fang
1. A. look at B. looked at C. looked up D. looked down
2. A. in B. on C. with D. wear
3. A. which to B. how to C. what to D. why to
4. A. Just then B. By then C. Just now D. A moment ago
5. A. no excuse B. an excuse C. excuse D. excuses
6. A. finding B. to find C. finds D. found
7. A. become B. became C. turned D. looked
8. A. why B. what C. because D. how
9. A. say hello to B. say goodbye to C. say sorry to D. say Happy New Year to
10. A. feel B. feeling C. feels D. to feel
三、阅读理解
A
Some people have very good memories, and can easily learn quite long poems by heart. There are other people who can only remember things when they have said them over and over.
The famous English writer, Charles Dickens said that he could walk down any long street in London and then tell you the name of every shop he had passed . Many of the great men of the world have had wonderful memories.
A good memory is a great help in learning a language. Everybody learns his own language by remembering what he hears when he is a small child, and some children seem to learn two languages almost as easily as one. In school it is not so easy to learn a second language because the pupils have so little time for it, and they are busy with other subjects as well.
A man’s mind is rather like a camera, but it takes photos not only of what we see but of what we feel, hear, smell and taste. When we take a real photo with a camera, there is much to do before the photo is finished and ready to show to our friends. In the same way there is much work to be done before we can keep a picture forever in our minds.
Memory is the diary that we all carry about with us.
1. Some people are good at__________.
A. remembering things B. learning a long poem
C. taking photos D. keeping a dairy
2. Other people can only remember things by _________.
A. keeping a picture B. hearing, smelling and tasting
C. learning a foreign language D. saying them again and again
3. Charles Dickens _________.
A. didn’t live in his won country
B. had a very poor memory
C. spoke two foreign languages as easily as English
D. had a very good memory
4. A good memory helps you _______.
A. keep a picture for ever
B. tell others the name of every shop in London
C. learn a language
D. hear, smell and taste
5. Remember things is rather like____.
A. learning poems B. taking photos C. learning English D. feeling things
B
Do you know something about the holiday camps in Hong Kong? The students in Hong Kong used to take part in an English holiday camp in their holidays. And their parents weren't with them. Though they were very young. Now they still enjoy taking part in many kinds of holiday camps without their parents. Many parents let their children take part in some kinds of holiday camps in order to learn some practical knowledge in their life. And also learn some knowledge about living skills, science, reading and writing... The most important for the children is to learn to look after themselves.
Holiday camps in Hong Kong are not so expensive. Most of the families can afford to send their children there for further study, for making their bodies strong... And the government never charges (收费) for them.
It is said that students in Hong Kong have much knowledge about many things. Perhaps it has something with the kinds of holiday camps.
1. Students in Hong Kong like to take part in the _______.
A. holiday camps B. English holiday camps
C. science holiday camps D. Chinese holiday camps
2. When students in Hong Kong are in the holiday camps, their parents ________.
A. must be with them B. have to look after them nearby
C. must stay at home D. aren't with them
3. The most important thing for the students to take part in the holiday camps hi Hong Kong is
_______.
A. to make their bodies strong B, to learn much knowledge about many things
C. to learn to look after themselves D. to have a further study about many subjects
4. The cost to take part in a holiday camp is ________.
A. very dear B. not cheap C. very high D. low
5. The students who often take part in the holiday camps _______.
A. must have much knowledge about many things
B. must he very thin
C. must he very tall
D. must be very beautiful
B. learn much knowledge about many things
C. learn to look after themselves
D. have a further study about many subjects
4. The students can take part in a holiday camp at a _______ cost.
A. dear B. half C. very high D. low
5. The students who often take part in the holiday camps must __________.
A. come from rich families B. be very skilled in sports
C. have much knowledge about many things D. come from poor families
( C )
We often hear people say, “ Never give up.” These can be encouraging words and words of determination（决心）. A peoson who believes in them will keep trying to reach his goal no matter how many times he fails. In my opinion, the quality of determination to succeed is an important one to have. Therefore, I believe that we should never give up.
One reason is that if we give up too easily, we will hardly achieve anything. It is not unusual for us to failin our first attempt at something new, so we should not feel discouraged（泄气的） and should try again. Besides, if we always give up when we fail, we will not be able to develop new skills and grow as people. Another reason we should never give up is that we can learn from our mistakes only if we make a new effort. If we do not try again, the lesson we have learnt is wasted. Finally, we should
never give up because as we work to reach our goals, we develop confidence, and this confidence can help us succeed in other areas of our lives. If we never challenge ourselves, we will begin to doubt our abilities.
In short, it is important that we do not give up when working for our goals. Whether we succeed in the end or not, we will learn something, and what we learn will help us to become better, more confident people. Furthermore, if we give up, we have no chance of attaining our goals, but if we keep trying, there is always a chance that we will succeed one day.
1. “Never give up.” can encourage ____________.
A. other people B. ourselves
C. other people and ourselves D. the students
2. If we give up too easily, we will ______________.
A. hardly achieve anything B. achieve anything
C. succeed D. be able to develop new skills
3. There is always a chance that we will succeed one day, if ____________.
A. we spend some money B. we keep trying
C. we do not try again D. we ask the teacher to help us
4. If we never challenge ourselves, _____________.
A. we will succeed B. we will have some abilities
C. we will begin to doubt our abilities D. other people will give us chances
5. This passage tells us ______________.
A. it is important not to give up when working for our goals
B. whether we succeed in the end or not, we will learn something
C. if we give up, we have no chance of attaining our goals
D. A, B and C
( D)
He was struggling（费劲） to tie his shoes. I was struggling with whether I should help him.
I did, and he was grated.
“ Thank you,” he said.
“ I’m gald I could help. I just thought it would be easier for me to reach,” I said.
He was a disabled man, and forced to look down most of the time. His arms and legs were twisted （扭曲的）terribly, and he couldn’t do what the rest of us would consider easy tasks. He always managed to look up to see how you reacted（反应） to his words, however. He had a big smile, making me feel comfortable.
I was still on my knees by his wheelchair.
“ Nice shoes,” he said.
“ Thanks. No one ever complimented me on them before,” I said.
“ No one has the same view of the world as I do,” he replied.
“ Tell me about the world as you see it,” I said smiling.
“ Most peole can see if someone is comfortable with them or not in their eyes. I see it in their feet,” he said. “ If people keep moving their feet, I just let them go, because I know they are impatient with me. I don’t want to make people uncomfortable.”
“ What about me?” I asked.
“ I could see your compassion. And them you look down to my level. I was the one who was nervous,” he said. “ I don't normally have someone look me in the eye.”
“ They don’t know that they are missing,” I told him.
“ My old face is mothing to brag（自夸） about,” he said.
“ But that smile is so big.”
Yes, and it’s not only a big smile but an attitude.
1. The disabled man knew people we impatient mostly by their ________.
A. words B. eyes C. feet D. smile
2. The unlined word compassion is the closet in meaning to ____________.
A. attention B. pity C. trust D. duty
3. We learn that disabled man _________.
A. had great difficulty looking after himself B. always asked people for help
C. couldn’t have a big smile D. like to talk about people’s shoes
4. The writer felt comfortable because ____________.
A. he had a nice talk to the man B. the man looked him in the eye
C. he didn’t move his feet before the man D. the man had a big smile on his face
5. We can infer from the passage that _________.
A. the disabled man had something wrong with his mind
B. mot many people went down to the man’s feet
C. the man was good at telling people about the world
D. the writer would not give the man mor help
E
Jack is a clerk of a bookstore. Here is the note from his boss. Ben. Jack has to decide what books to order according to the following note and the descriptions of the books.
Hi, Jack,
You must hand in the order list of books to me by the first working day of every month. The rules for choosing books are:
For textbooks:
●August is coming. We must choose all textbooks, without thinking of other rules.
For books which are not textbooks:
●If more than five copies of books were sold last month, we choose them. But if there are five copies or more in stock（现货）, we do not make an order.
●If the wholesale（批发）prices of the books are higher than $75, we do not choose them. And we do not order anything whose retail (零售) price is higher than $100.
Ben
The descriptions of the books
Title: Homeland English
Publisher（出版社）：Homeland Ltd
Wholesale price: $100
Retail price: $ 140
Textbook: Yes
Title: How to become successful
Publisher：Founders Company Ltd
Wholesale price: $25
Retail price: $40
Textbook: No
Copies sold last month: 3
Copies in stock: 2
Copies sold last month: 2
Copies in stock: 1
Title: Biology at a Glance
Publisher：New Times Publisher Ltd
Wholesale price: $70
Retail price: $ 95
Textbook: No
Copies sold last month: 18
Copies in stock: 3
Title: Good Health in 20 Days
Publisher：Oscar World Ltd
Wholesale price: $50
Retail price: $66
Textbook: No
Copies sold last month: 10
Copies in stock: 20
1. Jack much hand in the order list to his boss by ___________.
A. the first day of last August B. the last working day of this month
C. the last day of next Auguse D. the first working day of each month
2. If Jack wants to buy the books about success, he should order them form ________.
A. Homeland Ltd B. Founders Company Ltd
C. Oscar World Ltd D. New Times Publisher Ltd
3. The whole price of the book ___________ is over $ 100.
A. Homeland English B. Good Health in 20 Days
C. Biology at a Glance D. How to become successful
4. The number of the books sold best last month is ___________________.
A. 3 B. 10 C. 18 D. 20
5. Jack can’t buy Good Health in 20 Days because ___________.
A. it is not a school textbook B. its wholesale price is too high
C. the copies in stock are more than 5 D. the copies sold last month are over 5
四、选择词汇，完成对话。
A. time B. for C. vacation D. go E. hope F. when
A. Hi, Zhang Lan. You look so nice in that red skirt.
B: Thank you very much.
A: Where did you go on __________?
B: In Rizhao.
A: Rizhao? __________ did you go there?
B: Last week. I went there with my family.
A: How long did you stay there?
B: ___________ a whole week. We went sightseeing in many places.
A: We all know the beaches of Rizhao are very beatiful. Did you have a good ________ there?
B: Yes. When I was lying on the beach, I felt so cool and relaxed.
A: I __________ to visit it one day.
B: I’m sure you’ll love it.
五、选择句子，完成对话。
A. What can you do for me? B. Here’s a size 6.
C. What do you think of them? D. I’ll take them.
E. I am looking for a pair of white gloves. F. Can I help you?
G. How much are they?
Shop assistant: Good morning! ________________
Mr Watson: Yes. ___________ I think I wear size 6.
Shop assistant: The white gloves are on this side. Let me see... __________ These are very nice, and they are easy to wash, too.
Mr Watson: Oh, I’ll try them on. Hmm... They seem to fit. _____________
Shop assistant: Five dollars and twenty cents.
Mr Watson: All right. _____________ Here’s six dollars.
Shop assistant: Ok. Here's your change.
Mr Watson: Thank you.
六、书面表达。
根据下面的中文提示，写一篇80词左右的英语短文，题目和首句已给出。
中文提示：（1）对于英文学习者来说记忆英语单词很难；（2）有些单词很容易被忘记，应长期记忆；（3）记忆单词的方法要恰当，否则会浪费很多时间；（4）应在句中或文中理解和记忆单词，经常运用已经学过的单词。另外，在平时，我们应该有合理的饮食、放松的心情、充足的睡眠，还要多参加体育活动，以此来提高我们的记忆力。
（短语提示：a sensible diet合理的饮食，a relaxed mood放松的心情）
How to memorize English word?
It’s very hard for English learners to memorize new words. ___________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
八年级上册第八单元测
（总分：100 分考试时间：60分钟）
学校：________ 姓名：________
题号
一
二
三
四
五
六
七
八
总分
得分
阅卷人
一、单项选择题（10分）
1. _______ the last day of the English Week, the head teacher gave a speech to the whole school.
A. In B. On C. At D. /
2. What an ________ you give us!
A. amazing advice B. good news C. wonderful suggestion D. interesting suggestion
3. _____, he is the oldest of all. We should respect him.
A. In all B. At all C. After all D. Least of all
4. -- Amy looks very __________.
-- Yes, she is singing the song _______. Good for her!
A. confident, confidently B. confident, confident
C. confidently, confident D. confident, confidently
5. --How long ______ you ________ English?
--About 9 years.
A. did, learn B. are, learn C. do, learn D. have, learnt
6. Everyone thinks Avatar is well worth _______.
A. see B. seeing C. to see D. sees
7. Oh, it’s almost 9:00 o’clock. The train will leave in half an hour. You ______ take a taxi to the
railway station.
A. can B. may C. had better D. had better not
8. Making pictures in your mind _______ also a good way for you to memorize things.
A. is B. are C. has D. have
9. --I’m sorry. I forgot to bring your textbook.
--Never mind. I will borrow _______.
A. some else B. someone’s else C. someone else’s D. someone’s else’s
10. Tom has been in the factory ________ he left school.
A. when B. since C. as soon as D. for
二、语法选择题。（10分）
Evans lives in a city. He was a maths ___11___ three years ago. He taught __12_ and his students
liked him. So he decided to work in the middle school all his life. ___13__ a terrible accident changed his fortune(命运).
One spring he took his class to __14__ a place of interest. The children saw a lot of ___15__ things
and had a good time there. But ___16___ their way back to school, their bus was hit by a truck because
the young driver was drunk（喝醉酒的）. Five students __17__and more than half of the children were
__18___ in the accident.
He didn’t know how it had happened and was very__19__ it and after he came out of hospital, he left the school and became a _20_. He tried his best to stop the drivers from breaking the traffic regulations违反交通规则. He worked hard and was strict with the drivers. So the drivers were afraid of him.
11. A. worker B. teacher C. reporter D. farmer
12. A. well B. nice C. good D. badly
13. A. So B. And C. Or D. But
14 .A. build B. break C. visit D. find
15. A. terrible B. dangerous C. safe D. interesting
16. A. on B. in C. at D. to
17. A. left B. lived C. died D. fell
18. A. beat B. hurt C. touched D. stopped
19. A. sad about B. afraid of C. interested in D. worried about
20. A . soldier B. policeman C. bookseller D. cleaner
三、完型填空。（10分）
From Monday to Friday, most people are busy working or studying. But in the evenings and weekends, they are 21 and enjoy themselves. Some watch television or go to the cinema, others 22 sports, this is decided by their own interests. There are many different ways to spend our free time. Almost everyone has some kind of hobby: it may be something from 23 stamps to making model planes. Some hobbies are very expensive, but others don’t cost anything 24 . Some collections are worth a lot of money, others are valuable（有价值的）only to their owners.
I know a man who has a 25 collection worth （值得several thousand dollars. A short time ago, he
bought an unusual fifty-cent piece which 26 him $250! He was very happy about it and thought the price was all right. On the other hand, my youngest brother collects 27 . He has almost 600 of them, butI wonder if they are worth any money. 28 , to my brother, they are quite valuable. 29 makes him happier than to find a new match box（火柴盒）for his collection.
That’s what a hobby means, I think. It is something we 30 to do in our free time. The value in dollars is not important, but the pleasure it gives us is.
21. A. lucky B. clever C. funny D. free
22. A. think about B. join C. take part in D. take care of
23. A. collecting B. getting C. printing D. making
24. A. first of all B. at all C. of all kinds D. in all
25. A. book B. cloth C. stamp D. coin
26. A. spend B. took C. cost D. waste
27. A. stamps B. match boxes C. pens D. model planes
28. A. So B. However C. Because D. But
29. A. Nothing B. Everything C. Anything D. Something
30. A. have B. need C. enjoy D. like
四、阅读理解。（40分）
A
socials
Look at the poster below:
Wed 15th Oct
7pm—10pm
Fancy dress
Notes: Tickets sold at canteen---＄5
1. High schools in England hold dances, called socials联谊会, about once a term. They are called socials
because students are socializing with each other.
2. Snacks include food like chips and chocolate bars. Soft drinks are fizzy drinks like lemonade and Coca Cola.
--------come as your favorite TV character Prizes to be won Canteen open for snacks and soft drinks
3. Fancy dress is when you get dressed up (打扮) as somebody or something else, you don’t get dressed
in your normal clothes. Fancy dress parties are common for both you and older people.
31. The poster mainly talks about________.
A. a new movie at school B. a dance party at school
C. an outdoor activity D. a fashion show at school
32. Which of the following is Not True in this Social?
A. You can dance and make friends. B. You can buy snacks or Coke as you wish
C. You can see movies there. D. You can win the prizes in the party
33. Where can you buy the ticket?
A. At the schoolyard. B. At the cinema C. All the Students’ Club D. At the canteen
34. What do you have to wear?
A. Jeans B. Fancy dress C. School uniforms D. Party dresses
35. What do you mean by “snack”?
A. 食物 B. 零食 C. 甜品 D. 点心
B The computer is fast, and never makes a mistake. While people are too slow, mistakes sometimes happen. That’s what people often say when they talk about computers. For over half of a century（世纪), engineers have made better computers. Now a computer can do a lot of daily jobs wonderfully. It is widely used in factories, hospitals and banks. A computer can report, decide and control in almost every field. Many computer scientists are now thinking of making the computer “think” like a man. With the help of a person, a computer can draw pictures, write music, talk with people, play chess, recognize voices, translate languages and so on. Some people think it is cleverer than a man. Perhaps computers will really think and feel one day. Do you think that people will be afraid when they find that the computer is too clever?
36. Engineers have worked on computers for ________.
A. about a hundred years B. more than fifty years
C. over three years D. about ten years
37. According to this article, some people think a computer is _________ people.
A. more stupid than B. as clever as
C. slower than D. cleverer than
38. Computers are _____ people.
A. doing more and more jobs for B. are going to laugh at
C. are going to listen to D. thinking as
39. With the help of a person, a computer can _______.
A. draw pictures B. write music
C. talk with people or play chess with people D. do all the above
40. People will ________ the computers in the future.
A. really be afraid of B. make better use of C. fail to use D. help
C
I did a survey（调查）about our new school uniform. I asked students in our school what they think
about our school uniform. I asked five students this question— What do you think of our new school uniform? Three of them like the uniform. One of the students thinks that the school uniform is smart andthe colour is nice. Another student thinks that the uniform shows that you are part of the school. He also thinks that it is clean and tidy. The last student who likes the uniform thinks that the skirt is comfortable and the blazer（运动衣）looks smart.
In the group, two students do not like the uniform. One of them thinks that it is uncomfortable and the colour is not beautiful. The other student thinks that it is old-fashioned and the colour is bad. The surveyshows that the students have different ideas about the new school uniform. They have different ideas about the colour, comfort and style.
41.The writer tell us that________.
A. we like working when we are ill
B. germs can’t live in the water.
C. we can’t feel ill if the environment is bad.
D. we feel well when the environment is good.
42.Germs are________.
A. very small things that you can’t see with your eyes.
B. the things that don’t effect people.
C. the things that you can find with your eyes.
D. the things that are very big.
43. Where can germs be found? They can be found_________.
A. on the small thing B. in air and dust
C. only in dirty water D. everywhere
44.How will you feel if germs go into the finger that is cut?
A. I will feel nothing. B. I won’t mind.
C. I will feel tense. D. I will feel painful.
45. From the passage we know that________.
A. environment doesn’t affect our life
B. we don’t need to improve our environment
C. germs may make us ill
D. if the environment is better, germs will be more.
D
When we don’t understand each other’s language, we can talk with the help of signs.
A Frenchman was once travelling in England. He could not speak English at all. One
day he went intoa restaurant and sat down at a table. When the waiter came, he opened his mouth, put his fingers in it, and took out again. He wanted to say . “Bring me something to eat.” The waiter soon brought him a cup of tea. The man moved his head from side to side. The waiter understood him and took the tea away. In a moment he came with a cup of coffee. But the man again refused it. He shook his head whenever the waiter brought him something to drink, for drinks are not food. When the man was going away, another man came in. This man saw the waiter, and he put his hand on
his stomach. That was enough. In a few minutes there was a large plate of meat and vegetables on the table in front of him.
So you see, we can understand the language of signs as well as we can understand the language of words.
46. According to the passage, when people do not understand each other’s language, they can talk with
the help of ______.
A. a waiter B. a teacher
C. an Englishman D. their hands, heads, and other parts of their bodies.
47. A Frenchman signed to the waiter_______.
A. to give him some medicine B. to bring him a cup of coffee
C. to ask him for food D. to tell him what he said
48. The waiter brought the Frenchman ______________.
A. a cup of tea, a cup of coffee, and a lot of other drinks
B. a large plate of meat and vegetables
C. a lot of drinks and a big plate of meat
D. a lot of food and drinks.
49.Another man saw the waiter, and put his hand on his stomach. He meant__________.
A. he had a stomachache B. he was hungry
C. he was very thirsty D. he was full
50. From this story we know_______
A. people can only understand the language of words
B. people know the language of signs as well as the language of words
C. people can make a waiter understand what they want
D. people can only understand their language
五、单词与词组搭配。
A. 根据句意和所给首字母，写出单词，使句子完整通顺。（共5分）
1. He won the first prize in yesterday’s c____________.
2. Our English teacher gave us a s___________ about how to improve our spoken English.
3. It is a good c__________ of studying English.
4. We should c___________ better with our parents.
5. What’s your o___________ about this problem.
B. 完成句子（共10分）
1. 这份工作最吸引我的是有旅游的机会。
What attracts men most to the job is _________ _________ _________ _________.
2. 我们应该给孩子们一个展示他们自己的机会。
We should give our children ________ ___________ _________ ________ themselves.
1. 天晚了，我必须回家了。
It’s late now. I ________ _________ go home.
2. 以我之见，爱是一种心灵的感觉。
Love is a feeling of one’s heart, ________ ___________ _______ ________.
3. 这辆自行车轻巧又结实，最重要的是它还很便宜。
The bike is light, strong, __________ _____________ ___________, inexpensive.
六、书面表达（15分）
假如你是某初中学生李光，进入初中后，你觉得学英语的方式与小学时有很大不同，请给自己的英语王老师写一封信，讲述自己的英语学习情况。要包括以下内容：
1. 开始学习初中英语时，觉得比小学英语难很多，几乎丧失信心（lose heart）。
2. 后来认识到英语的重要性（importance）。
3. 每天努力学习英语。
4. 向老师和同学请教更好的英语学习方法。
5. 现在英语取得了很大进步，对英语越来越感兴趣。
Dear Mr. Li,
I’m glad to tell you that I have made great progress in my English study since I became a junior high school student
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Wish you all the best. Yours,
Li Guang
八年级上册期末测试卷
（总分：100 分考试时间：60分钟）
学校：________ 姓名：________
题号
一
二
三
四
五
六
七
八
总分
得分
阅卷人
二、语言知识及运用（共两节, 满分20分）
第一节 单项选择 (共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分)
16. Doing more exercise _______ the key to keeping fit.
A. be B. am C. are D. is
17. After he had read the new words , he went on _______ the text .
A. read B. reads C. to read D. reading
18. .It is rude______ at other people.
A. of you to staring B. for you stared C. of you to stare D. for you to
stare
19. The young man is _______ to carry the heavy box .
A. enough strong B. strong enough C. too strong D. so strong
20. ---Alice, I hear there is a new library in your city. Could you tell me _______?
---Sure.
A. how far is it B. how I can get there
C. where is it D. which bus should I take
21. ----30 classes took part in the school singing competition. Which class do you think sang____?
-----Of course our class did.
A. more beautifully B. more beautiful
C. most beautiful D. most beautifully
22. Sally can hardly say anything after the terrible accident, _____?
A. can she B. can’t she C. does she D. doesn’t she
23. ---Why are your parents always worried ______ you ?
---Because I don’t listen to her and always make her angry.
A. with B. of C. about D. for
24. Fresh vegetables and fruit _______ us . We should eat them often .
A. are good at B. are good for C. are good with D. are good of
25. Some students ________ in the tutorial centers（辅导中心）at weekends
A. are forced to learn B. are forced to learning
C. force to learn D. force to learning
第二节 语法选择 (共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分)
My friend, David Smith, kept birds. One day he phoned and _26_ me he would be away for a week. He asked me to feed the birds _27_ him and said he would leave his key in my mailbox.
Unfortunately, I did not remember to feed the birds _28_ the night before David was going to return. I rushed out of my house and it was already dark when I arrived at _29_ house. I soon found the key he gave me could unlock neither the front door _30_ the back door! I kept _31_ of what David would say when he came back.
Then I noticed _32_ one bedroom window was open. I found a big stone and
pushed it under the window. _33_ the stone was very heavy, I made a lot of noise. But in the end, I managed to climb up.
I had one leg inside the bedroom when I suddenly realized that someone _34_ a torch(电筒)up at me. I looked down and saw _35_ policeman and an old lady, one of David’s neighbours. “What are you doing up there?” said the policeman. Feeling like a fool, I replied, “I was just going to feed Mr Smith’s birds.”
26. A. tell B. tells C. told D. had told
27. A. with B. to C. for D. at
28. A. until B. before C. as D. since
29. A. her B. his C. their D. our
30. A. and B. but C. or D. nor
31. A. to think B. think C. thinking D. thought
32. A. how B. that C. what D. why
33. A. If B. Because C. When D. Whether
34. A. is shining B. was shone C. shines D. was shining
35. A. a B. the C. an D. 不填
三、完形填空 （共10小题；每小题1分，满分10分）
The Japanese Macaca monkey has been studied in the wild for over 50 years. In 1952, on one small Japanese island, scientists dropped some _36_ in the dirt for the monkeys. The monkeys liked their taste, but they found the dirt _37_.
One clever 18-month-old monkey found she could _38_ the problem by washing the sweet potatoes in a nearby river. She taught this to her mother. Her _39_ also learned this new way and they taught their mother, too.
All the younger monkeys _40_ learned to wash the dirty sweet potatoes to make them _41_ to eat. But many of the adults found it very hard to learn this and still ate the _42_ sweet potatoes.
Then something very surprising _43_ . In the autumn of 1958, scientists found that the monkeys on other nearby _44_ began washing their sweet potatoes, too. Scientists still don’t fully understand how this knowledge was _45_ from one island to
another.
36. A. sweet potatoes B. green plants C. hard stones D. fresh nuts
37. A. beautiful B. terrible C. difficult D. interesting
38. A. find B. reach C. solve D. understand
39. A. children B. brothers C. sisters D. friends
40. A. quietly B. easily C. angrily D. awfully
41. A. nicer B. smaller C. lighter D. drier
42.A. small B. large C. new D. dirty
43. A. took on B. took off C. took place D. took away
44. A. trees B. islands C. beaches D. rivers
45. A. lost B. dropped C. passed D. left
四、阅读理解 （共20小题；每小题2分，满分40分）
(A)
The train started moving. It was packed with people of all ages. Most of them were working men and women and young college boys and girls. Near the window sat an old man with his son, who looked about thirty years old.
As the train moved, the son was filled with joy because he was very excited at the scenery(景色) outside. He said in a high voice, “See Dad, the green trees and the scenery are very beautiful!” It made the other people feel very strange. Everyone started talking in a low voice about the old man’s son. Suddenly, it started raining. Raindrops fell on the travelers through the opened window. Seeing the rain, the old man’s son said happily, “See Dad, how beautiful the rain is!” Hearing these words, a young lady became angry with the man, as the raindrops were dropping on her new clothes. She couldn’t help shouting at the noisy son and his father.
“Can’t you see it is raining? You! Old man! If your son is not feeling well, get him to a mental hospital(精神病院) quickly and please don’t disturb（干扰） us any more!” The old man’s face turned slightly red and then in a low voice, he replied, “We are on the way back from hospital. He was blind at birth. Only last week he can see again. The rain and the nature are new to him. Please forgive him.” All the other people became quiet.
46. How old was the old man’s
son?
A. About 7 years old. B. About 20 years old.
C. About 50 years old. D. About 30 years old.
47. What did people think of the son’s behavior(行为)? They thought he was ________.
A. lovely B. funny C. strange D. clever
48. What was wrong with the son when he was born?
A. He had mental illness. B. He couldn’t see.
C. He couldn’t hear. D. He couldn’t walk.
49. What do you think of the young lady?
A. She was friendly to the man. B. She was rude to the man.
C. She was clever. D. She was too noisy.
50. According to the passage, what does the writer want to tell us?
A. We should be friendly to sick people.
B. We should learn to enjoy the nature.
C. We should respect the elder people.
D. We should know the truth before complaining
（B）
Do you carry your mobile phone around ? Don’t do it again. Leave it at a place where you can hear it ringing. In this way you make sure that you at least get up and walk towards it . This might sound silly but I really mean it . You need a reason to keep yourself going.
Life today has become so easy . All we have to do is to push a button here and push a button there. The only things that get any exercise at all are our fingers . According to Darwin , when we often use a part of the body , it develops a lot , but if a part is not used at all , it will become smaller and smaller and finally disappear.
One example is the long neck of the giraffe . When the giraffe reached higher and higher for the leaves on the top of a tree , its neck appeared to become longer and longer . And the other example is the tails in human beings . They disappeared because they were not used for a long time .
Now if Darwin’s idea is true , man in the future is likely to have just a huge head , a
few fingers and maybe some other parts of the body that are also being used . That is why I say that you have to make yourself move about.
What I would suggest is that at home or school or in your office , leave the mobile phone lying about so that you can hear it ring , but can’t just reach into your pocket and answer it . Make sure you have to stand up and walk a few steps before you can pick it up.
51. Where does the writer suggest you put your mobile phone ?
A. in your hand B. At a place where it’s difficult to reach
C. In your pocket D. At a place where you can hear it ringing
52. According to the writer , what are the only parts of man’s body that can get exercise in modern life ?
A. The ears B. The legs C. The fingers D. The arms
53. Which of the following supports Darwin’s idea ?
A. The tail of the dog B. The neck of the giraffe
C. The leaves on the top of a tree D. The fingers of human beings .
54. What will a man be like in the future , according to the writer , if Darwin’s idea is true ?
A. He will have a huge body and a big head .
B. He will mainly have a huge head and a few fingers .
C. He will be strong and very clever
D. he will be too weak to push a button.
55. What’s the main idea of the passage ?
A. Man should try to do any possible exercise in modern life
B. Man should make good use of modern technologies to live a comfortable life
C. it will take many years to prove Darwin’s idea to be true .
D. Modern Technologies are making people busier and busier.
(C)
Watering plants is an important part of having a garden. But different plants have different needs. Plants like plenty of water, but how do you know what is too much or too little? Here are just a few helpful suggestions you may want to
consider.
3 Do’s 3 Don’ts
Water early.
Water in the morning before it begins to get hot. It’s a perfect time to water your plants. This way they are ready for the hottest parts of the day. Don’t water too much.
Although plants are usually thirsty, too much water can be harmful to their growth. If you notice the leaves are becoming yellow and falling off, it is a clear sign of too much water.
Drain （排水） properly.
Be sure to check the surrounding area of your plants regularly. The extra water should be drained well. Don’t water late.
This is especially important. Although not everyone will be able to do their watering in the early morning hours, try not to wait too late in the day. If you water in the afternoon when it is hot, lots of water will evaporate （蒸发）before reaching the roots. If you water in the evening, the roots will be too wet.
Prevent insects.
A thin, fine mist （喷雾） will prevent insects from setting on the leaves and flowers. Don’t water the leaves.
The most ideal place to begin is the root. This is where most of the growth and development takes place. In order for your plants to be strong, the roots have to be healthy.
To really know what works well for your plants, watch them for signs of over watering or signs of not getting enough water. For more great advice on rose watering and growing roses, visit http:// www. myroseguide. com.
56. Why is it a perfect time to water plants in the morning ?
A. Because water is cold in the morning.
B. Because you can know how much water is needed.
C. Because plants can be ready for the hot day.
D. Because plants need very little water in the morning.
57. How do you know there is too much water for the plants?
A. The extra water can’t be drained
well.
B. The water on the leaves doesn’t evaporate.
C. Insects begin setting on the leaves and flowers.
D. The leaves are becoming yellow and falling off.
58. The underlined word “ideal” means ________ in Chinese.
A. 理想的 B. 健康的 C. 干燥的 D. 湿润的
59. Which of the following is true according to the article?
A. It’s difficult to know whether the water is too much or too little.
B. The roots will get too much water if we water in the evening.
C. Watering the leaves can make insects fly away.
D. The roots won’t get enough water if we drain the plants well.
60. Where can you probably read this article?
A. In a magazine about gardening. B. In a dictionary about plants.
C. In an interview with a gardener. D. In a story book about plants.
(D)
Do you feel happy in your life ? Happiness are for everyone . You don’t need to care about those people who have beautiful houses with large gardens and swimming pools or those who have nice cars and a lot of money and so on . Why ? Because those who have big houses may often feel lonely and those who have cars may want to walk on the country roads at their free time .
In fact , happiness are always around you if you put your heart into it . When you are in trouble at school , your friends will help you . When you study hard at your lessons , your parents are always taking care of your life and your health . When you get success , your friends will say congratulations to you . When you do something wrong , people around you will help you to correct it . And when you do something good to others , you will feel happy too. All these are your happiness. If you notice a bit of them , you can see that happiness are always around you .
Happiness are not the same as money . It is the feeling of your heart . When you are poor , you can also say you are very happy , because you have something else that can’t be bought with money . When you meet with difficulties , you can say loudly you are very happy , because you have more chances to challenge yourself. So you
cannot always say you are poor and you have bad luck . As the saying goes , “ Life is like a revolving（旋转的）door ” When it closes , it also opens . If you take every chance you get , you can be a happy and lucky person.
61. Those who have big houses may often feel ______.
A. happy B. excited C. free D. lonely
62. What will you r friends say to you when you make great progress ?
A. So do I ! B. Good luck! C. Congratulations ! D. Just so-so!
63. What does the underlined word “it” refers to ?
A. happiness B. life C. door D. chance
64. When you fall down in PE class , both your teacher and your classmates will _____.
A. laugh at you B. play jokes on you
C. quarrel with you D. help you up
65. Which is NOT right according to the passage ?
A. People who have cars would never like to walk in the open air.
B. You can get help from others when you make mistakes .
C. You can still be a happy person even if you have little money .
D. Happiness are always around you though you have difficulties .
五、写作 (共三节，满分30分)
第一节 单词拼写 根据句子意思和所给的首字母写出所缺单词。（共5小题，每小题1分，满分5分）
66. They went to the same c__________ after finishing high school.
67. She came to r________ me that I should return the book to the library tomorrow.
68. Staying up late can damage your h________.
69. I am sorry. It is my f________.
70. She has a good voice, and she wants to be a s________ when she grows up.
第二节 完成句子 （共5小题，每小题2分，满分10分）
根据所给的汉语内容，用英语完成下列句子。（每空只写一词）
71. 我喜欢踢足球胜过于游泳。
I _______ ________ football
________ ________
72．成功取决与你的辛勤工作。
Success __________ _________ your hard work.
73．我们应该充分利用时间。
We should _________ _________ ________ _________ of time.
74．我不知道他是怎样染上恶习的。
I didn’t know _______ he ________ _________ bad _________.
75．对我来说，要做出决定是很难的。
________ is difficult _______ me _________ _________ a decision.
第三节 书面表达（共1小题，满分15分）
近期我校举行运动会，同学们对参加运动会有着自己的看法，经过调查，同学们有两种不同的观点：
有些人认为有必要(necessary) 另一些人没有必要
1. 可以锻炼身体；
2. 收获友谊
3. 很开心，可以有美好的回忆 1. 浪费时间，无聊；
2. 学不到有用的知识；
3. 很累，没时间休息
你自己的观点？
请根据以上提示, 并给出自己的观点，写一篇字数为80字以上的英语短文， 文章开头已给出，不计入总词数内。
All of us took part in the sports meeting last month. We did a survey on students’ opinions about taking part in the sport meeting . There are two different viewpoints on it.____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
八年级上册英语单词表
Vocabulary
Unit1
*encyclopedia n. 百科全书
human adj. 人的
dinosaur n. 恐龙
*Italian n. 意大利人
inventor n. 发明家
musician n. 音乐家
scientist n. 科学家
born v.(be born) 出生
countryside n. 乡村；农村
intelligence n. 才智；智慧
*artistic adj. 有艺术天赋的
ability n. 才能；能力
perhaps adv. 可能；大概
invention n. 发明
notebook n. 笔记本
include v. 包括；包含
even adv. 甚至
however adv. 然而
suddenly adv. 突然；忽然
nobody pron. 没有人
*fossil n. 化石
win v.（won, won)（在比赛中） 获胜，赢
dollar n. 元（美国，加拿大等国家的货币单位）
in the countryside 在乡村；在农村
human being 人
die out 灭绝；消失
find out 了解(到）；弄清
go for a walk 去散步
Unit2
number n. 数字
instructions n.[pl.] 指示；命令
check v. 检查；核实
gram n. 克（重量单位）
son n. 儿子
chess n. 国际象棋；棋盘
India n. 印度
wise adj. 充满智慧的
challenge v. 向（某人）挑战
promise v. 许诺，承诺
prize n. 奖赏，奖品
grain n. 谷粒
chessboard n. 国际象棋
double v. 加倍
amount n. 数量；数额
rest n. 剩余部分
gold n. 金子；黄金
instead adv. 代替；顶替
realize v. 认识到；意识到
copy v. 抄写；誊写
correctly adv. 准确无误地；正确地
traffic n. 交通
accident n. （交通）事故
a long time ago 很早以前
challenge…to… 向（某人）挑战
and so on ……等等
copy down 抄写；誊写
Unit3
order n. 订货；订购
compare v. 比较；对比
monitor n. （计算机）显示器
speaker n. 扬声器
main unit n. （计算机）主机
keyboard n.（计算机或打字机）键盘
mouse n.（计算机）鼠标
type v. 打字
brain n. 脑
control v. 操纵，控制（机器或系统等）
expensive adj. 昂贵的；价格高的
tiny adj. 极小的；微小的
depend v. 依靠；依赖
*calculate v. 计算
speed n. 速度
operate v. 操纵；控制
railway n. 铁路系统
company n. 公司
price n. 价格
total n. 总额；合计
inch n. 英寸
sell v. (sold, sold) 出售；售卖
popular adj. 受喜爱的；受欢迎的
work as 从事……工作
(be) unaware of 没意识到；未察觉
depend on 依靠
in addition 除……以外（还）
grand total 总计；共计
look forward to 盼望；期待
Unit4
advertisement n. 广告
funny adj. 滑稽的；好笑的
create v. 创造；创作
telephone n. 电话；电话机
wheel n. 轮子
comfortable adj. 使人舒服的；舒适的
carriage n. （旧时载客的）四轮马车
century n. 世纪
passenger n. 乘客；旅客
invent v. 发明；创造
practical adj. 有用的；适用的
since prep. 从……以后；自……以来
distance n. 距离；间距
mobile n. 移动电话；手机
anytime adv. 在任何时候；随便什么时候
develop v. 开发；研制
lamp n. 灯
candle n. 蜡烛
daytime n. 白天；日间
dust n. 灰尘；尘土
special adj. 特别的；特殊的
wing n. （飞行器的）翅膀；机翼
introduction n. 引言
instead of 代替；作为……的替换
petrol 汽油
since then 自那以来
keep in touch with 与……保持联系
in the daytime 在白天
keep...off 使……不接近（或不接触、远离）……
at the same time 同时
Unit 5
educational adj. 有关教育的；有教育意义的
exchange n. 交流；互访
culture n. 文化
host n. 主人
local adj. 地方的；当地的
British adj. 英国的
glad adj. 高兴；愉快
guest n. 客人；宾客
chopstick n. 筷子
weekday n. 工作日（星期一至星期五的某一天）
tour v. 在……旅游
fantastic adj. 极好的；了不起的
experience n. （一次）经历，体验
*tai chi n. 太极（拳）
already adv. 已经；早已
introduce v. 使……初次了解……；使尝试
success n. 成功
yet adv. 尚未；仍未
respect v. 慎重对待；尊重
at first 起初；起先
so far 到目前为止；迄今为止
a bit of 小量
introduce....to 使……初次了解；使尝试
come over（to…）（通常远距离地）从……到……
Unit 6
ancient adj. 古代的
*Trojan n. 特洛伊人
war n. 战争
understand v.(understood,
understood) 理解
difference n. 差别；不同（之处）
*pyramid n. （古埃及的）金字塔
captain n. 首领
*Greek n. 希腊人
*capture v. 用武力夺取；攻占
soldier n. 士兵
huge adj. 巨大的
pull v. （向某方向）拖，拉动
main adj. 主要的
celebrate v. 庆祝；祝贺
stupid adj. 笨的；傻的
midnight n. 午夜；子夜
empty adj. 空的
except prep. 除……之外
secret n. 秘密的
side n. 侧面
quietly adv. 安静地
army n. 陆军部队
enter v. 进来；进入
succeed v. 达到目的；实现目标
trick n. 计谋
prince n. 王子
queen n. 王后
steal v.(stole, stolen) 偷；窃取
punish v. 处罚；惩罚
scene n. （戏剧或歌剧）场
sir n. 先生
act out 将……表演出来
make jokes about 拿……开玩笑；以……为笑柄
except for 除……之外
(be) full of （有）大量的；（有）许多的
in the end 最后
come on （用于命令）快；加油；加把劲
Unit 7
memory n. 记忆力；记性
n. 回忆；记忆
corner n. 角
lose v. (lost, lost)丧失；失去
improve v. 改进；改善
mention v. 提到；说到
method n. 方法；办法
spelling n. 拼写；拼法
mind n. 头脑；大脑
silly adj. 可笑的
mile n. 英里
letter n. 字母
worth adj. 值得；有价值
spell v. (spelt, spelt) 用字母拼；拼写
unless conj. 除非
trouble n. 困难
list n. 清单
step n. 步骤
cycle n. 循环
similar adj. 相像的；类似的
note n. 纸币
wallet n. 钱包；皮夹子
basket n. 篮；筐
manager n.（企业的）经理
take out （从银行账户中）提取（款）
pour out 涌出
Unit8
speech n. 演说；发言
notice n. 通告；布告
competition n. 比赛；竞赛
treasure n. 珍宝；宝物
text n. 文本
chance n. 机会；机遇
confidently adv. 自信地
topic n. 话题
winner n. 优胜者
advise v. 建议
several det. 几个；一些
opinion n. 意见，想法
whole adj. 整个的；全部的
suggestion n. 建议；提议
communicate v. （与某人）交流信息；沟通
whenever conj. 在任何……的时候；在任何……的情况下
rich adj. 富有的；富裕的
poor adj. 贫穷的；贫寒的
hide v. (hid, hidden) 藏；隐蔽
attack v. 袭击；攻击
shy adj. 羞怯的；腼腆的
else adv. 其他的；别的
choose v. (chose, chosen)选择；挑选
treasure hunt 寻宝游戏
in public 公开地；在别人（尤指生人）面前
put on 上演
in my opinion 依我看
above all 最重要的是；尤其是
look out 小心；当心
相关文档
- 2020秋八年级英语上册Module92021-10-116页
- 八年级英语上册Unit5Doyouwanttowa2021-10-114页
- 2020八年级英语上册 Unit 2 Lesso2021-10-112页
- 译林版八年级英语上册期末复习课件2021-10-11116页
- 八年级上英语课件《I＇m more outgoi2021-10-1130页
- 仁爱版英语八年级上册Unit 1 （Sesti2021-10-113页
- 第一学期八年级英语（人教版）期末质量2021-10-114页
- 八年级英语上册Unit8Howdoyoum教学2021-10-1131页
- 八年级英语上册Unit6I’mgoingtost2021-10-1119页
- 牛津初二英语B期中考试专项选择题2021-10-116页
微信/支付宝扫码支付下载